Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

click (New). Click View menu ➤ Zoom. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. While working in the drawing area.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. and View. In addition. For example. This creates a new project based on the default template. which are listed on the menu. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Edit. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. you type the required key combination to perform the command. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. By default. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . a door type is specified.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. On the left side of the Options Bar.

8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 9 In the Type Selector. when you add a door. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. For example. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. 11 Click OK. containing buttons grouped by function. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . click the tab in the Design Bar.

select Views (all). You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. schedules. delete. and groups. reports. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. In the Project Browser. families. families. and rename views. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . sheets.TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.

Navigating the User Interface | 15 . ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. double-click its name.■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. Do not click. 3D). Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. elevations. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. To open a view. After creating a browser organization scheme. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Wall. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. windows). click Cancel. family category (doors. The browser is dockable. and group name. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. walls. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.

in conjunction with tooltips. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 18 On the Design Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. You can use this tri-pane. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle).In the bottom left corner of the window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. There are several tools that help you find information. Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. In this case. regarding selected elements in a view. The status bar also provides information. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. 20 Press TAB." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. find a keyword on the Index tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the status bar. When you place the cursor over an element. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. It highlights when the cursor is over it. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help.

1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. press F1 for context-sensitive help. In the following steps. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Tooltips: To see tooltips. If no Help button displays. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. click on the Standard toolbar.rvt. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Windows: From any window.In addition. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. You can also press SHIFT+F1. press F1 for help. After you are familiar with these tasks. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Toolbar: From the toolbar. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. Click the Help button. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons.

7 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 On the View toolbar. the view zooms out from the building model. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction .The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. the view zooms in on the selected area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click Zoom To Fit. In the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window.

click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. As you move the mouse. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and then using the Zoom tool again. press ESC.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and click Help. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. on the View toolbar. . If you do not have a wheel mouse. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 15 To exit the wheel. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. NOTE As you zoom in and out. To modify or add snap increments. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. To define settings for SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Options. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out.

and double-click 2nd Flr. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. to lengthen the wall. Similar controls. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. bottoms. expand Floor Plans. Small blue dots. display along the ends. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Cnst. and select the wall.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and on the Tools toolbar. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . When drawing or modifying a building model. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. referred to as shape handles. expand Views (all). 17 Type ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. called drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. 18 Click and drag the left control. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. as shown. click (Move). These are the drag controls.

24 Select the plant. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click to specify the starting position. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. as shown. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . The table moves down. After selecting the element to move. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case. and drag it on top of the table. for example. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. such as Move and Copy.Some commands. 23 Click next to the lower wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command.

Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. and click again to end it. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Some commands. In this example. 29 To end the command. Press ESC twice. All changes you make to a project are tracked. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). such as the Lines command. click Lines. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. click Modify. 26 On the Undo menu. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. select the second item in the list. On the Design Bar.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

25 . and exhaust systems using these components. and to place and size ductwork. return. In Revit MEP. When you have finished these tutorials. you can create supply. secondary supply air systems and a primary. you add and connect the air handler. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. and size the ductwork. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. which is the physical representation of the system. high pressure system. Finally. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. connect it to existing air terminals. creating the primary supply system. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1.

scroll until the folder is displayed. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click the Design Bar. VAV box in the model. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. click Training Files. The Mechanical commands are displayed. If necessary. you create the logical system shown above on the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog. fan-powered.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .rvt file located in the Imperial folder. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. creating a secondary supply system. click the Mechanical tab. you place a parallel. At the beginning of this exercise. In this exercise. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. and click Mechanical.

You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. In this tutorial. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. click Mechanical Equipment. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. To pan. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. To zoom in and out. you find the command at the far left of the screen. The entire model displays on the screen. 4 Type ZR. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Then. hold the wheel down and drag. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. roll the wheel. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. you can enter ZE to zoom out.In this tutorial. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. The model zooms to the specified area.

28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model.8 inch Inlet. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees.Directly above the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. but do not click. click Modify to end the command. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown.

18 Click to select the air terminal. ■ 15 Click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. you can enter 10 0 without units. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor. Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box.Airflow. After the system is created. and click Element Properties. this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. for Offset. The air terminal turns red. enter 10' 0".) ■ Under Mechanical .200000 (20%). Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it.13 Right-click the VAV box. indicating that it has been selected. or just 10. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. You do not need to enter the units.

The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. the equipment supplying the system. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. 27 On the Options bar. click (Select Equipment For System). select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. and click to select it.20 While pressing CTRL. click (Edit System). (Create Supply Air System). move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. and the number of elements that make up the system. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box. 21 While pressing CTRL. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. click Modify to end the command. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. click 23 On the Options Bar. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. indicating that they are selected. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the air terminals display in red. 25 On the Design Bar.

the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. The sketch graphics highlight.rvt. 30 Press TAB. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. the ductwork. You could change the name by overwriting it. click (Layout Path).Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . click Finish. select Network. you create the physical connection for the system. for Solution Type. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. Do not click. however. In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you leave it unchanged. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Next. In this tutorial. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. 2 On the Options Bar. showing the logical connection between the components of the system.

click Settings. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Click OK. select Main. plumbing. and fire protection systems.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. click solutions. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. for Duct Type. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. click Finish Layout. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Branch. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. for Duct Type. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. which is located to the far left of the drawing area.Round. piping.

and type SD. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. Velocity. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. and equipment is highlighted. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. 18 On the Options Bar. 14 Press TAB. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. click Sizing. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. Equal Friction. fittings. Do not click. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. Click Check None. and enter . You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Select Ducts. Select Flex Ducts. If the entire network does not highlight. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. 20 Click OK.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. the system has not been created properly. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. and Static Regain.08 in-wg/100ft. select Friction. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Select Duct Fittings.

36 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties).Airflow. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. The ductwork is sized using the friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). for Branch Sizing. 23 Click OK. 30 Select the segment of duct shown.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. select the segment of duct shown. 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. In the Element Properties dialog. The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. 26 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar.Airflow.Airflow. under Mechanical . The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal. Next. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. click Modify to end the command. Under Constraints. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. scroll to Mechanical . 28 Click OK. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. 24 On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Element Properties). 33 Click OK. select Calculated Size Only. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. scroll to Mechanical . 37 Click OK. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings.

select 12".Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. This specifies the duct diameter. For D:. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems. in the location shown by the pencil. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 To start the duct run. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems.rvt. select 10' 0". ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. select Round Duct : Taps. click Duct. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. For Offset.

click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Type ZR. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. Draw the main trunk line again. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. 10 In the Type Selector. as described above. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. click Duct Fitting. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing.

12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. closing the right end of the duct run. click Modify to end the command. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the leftmost VAV. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. 20 Select the primary air duct. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . 18 In the Select Connector dialog. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. 13 Click to place the end cap. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. click 19 Click OK. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. First. 17 On the Options Bar. (Connect Into).

and click Draw Duct. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. 22 Select the VAV box. you manually draw the connecting duct. and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 21 Type ZR. Connect the other secondary system Next. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar. you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. click Mechanical Equipment.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. click Modify to end the command. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Do not click. Next. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. 25 On the Design Bar. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. primary system. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown.rvt. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. select Air Handler : 10 ton. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 .

click Modify to end the command. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 6 Click to place the air handler.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. Do not click. 7 On the Design Bar.

intake. and click Draw Duct. and exhaust. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. Under Offset. 11 Right-click the connector. The connectors on the front of the unit. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. return. click (Apply Current Offset). select 10' 0".9 Click to select the air handler. On the Options Bar. are also visible. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . These are the connectors for the air handler supply. for the hydronic supply and return.

18 Right-click the center point of the duct. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view.A vertical section of duct is created. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. and click. 13 Press ESC. past the end of the primary duct. 19 Move the cursor to the right. and click Draw Duct. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created.

The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. 24 Press ESC. click (Element Properties). and then select the rightmost VAV box. 25 Select the air handler. 26 On the Options Bar. (Select Equipment for System). ■ 23 Select the air handler.20 Press ESC twice to end the command. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . select the leftmost VAV box.

33 On the Design Bar. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection. the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes. click (Trim/Extend). In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line.815 CFM. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. 36 Click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command.In the Element Properties dialog. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. click System Browser. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. 34 Select the air handler. notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. 27 Click OK. click (Element Properties). 35 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical . under Mechanical . 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected.Airflow. This is the capacity of the air handler.Airflow. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar.

i Express Workshop Supply Air System. you inspect part of the system you created. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components. click (System Inspect). Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . 39 In the System Browser. and double-click 3D HVAC. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. close the System Browser. 2 Select a section of a secondary system. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. Next. expand Mechanical (3 systems). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created.rvt. 41 When you are done. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it.

The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. and pressure loss. select Duct Color Fill .Flow. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick.The selected system maintains its appearance. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. click Inspect. the other systems are displayed in half tone. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Duct Color Scheme Legend. click Cancel Inspector. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. including flow. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. visual indication of a system’s air flow. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. under Color Scheme. static pressure.

lighting fixtures. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. temperature rating. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. junction boxes. Wiring types (including material. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. Creating a Supply Air System. voltage definitions. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. After creating the logical connections. click No. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. The legend remains selected. junction boxes. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . distribution systems. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and switches. and demand factors have been defined. The color is removed from the ductwork. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. receptacles. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. including power panels. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. and insulation type). power circuits. (Delete) to delete the legend. under Schemes. select none. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. . You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. As you create circuits. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. click 15 Click OK. 18 When prompted to save the model.13 On the Options Bar.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. and click Electrical. click the Electrical tab. The Electrical commands are displayed.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. you find the command at the far left of the screen. In this tutorial. click Training Files. right-click the Design Bar. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar.

To zoom in and out. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. The entire model displays on the screen. In this tutorial. Then. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. you can enter ZE to zoom out. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 4 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. roll the wheel. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. hold the wheel down and drag. The model zooms to the specified area. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. To pan. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 .

indicating that they are selected. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. and click to select it. they display in red. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. indicating that it has been selected.The lighting fixture highlights. 11 While pressing CTRL. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. 10 While pressing CTRL. The lighting fixture turns red. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures.

click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. click (Create Power Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. which is the logical connection between the elements. 13 On the Options Bar.12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the created circuit.

Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 17 When you release the mouse button. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. all the elements within the window are selected.

click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). The lighting fixtures remain selected. Click Check None. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). Click OK. 20 While pressing CTRL.18 On the Options Bar. click (Create Power Circuit). which is the logical connection between the elements. 22 On the Options Bar. Select Lighting Fixtures. click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1.

you have created 2 lighting circuits. Do not click. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Modify a circuit At this point. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics.

29 In the Power : 1 dialog.The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. click (Edit Circuit). click Finish. Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. click (Add To Circuit). 28 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures.

The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. click System Browser. At this point. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. are created. 36 In the System Browser.The modified circuit is highlighted. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. 38 When you are done. the wiring. Next. only the logical connections between the elements exist. 35 On the Design Bar. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. close the System Browser. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1.

click (Edit Switch System). (Select Switch). The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone. The switches have already been placed in the model. Creating Switch Systems | 57 . click 5 Select the switch as shown. click (Create Switch System). 4 In the Switch System dialog. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. 2 On the Options Bar. you create switch systems to define switching behavior.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. click (Add to System). As you select each lighting fixture. under Electrical . The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. 7 One by one. The switch system highlights. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Finish.Lighting. 6 In the Switch System dialog. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. enter A. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Click OK. 13 Press TAB. click (Switch Properties). for Switch ID.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area. the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it.

Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog.Lighting. Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. click (Create Switch System). click Finish. enter B. Click Check None. for Switch ID. (Select Switch). 20 In the Switch System dialog. Click OK. The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. click 21 Select the switch as shown. The selection is filtered. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. under Electrical . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. (Edit Switch System). click 19 On the Options Bar. Creating Switch Systems | 59 .14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. click (Switch Properties). Select Lighting Fixtures. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).

you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Then. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. you define the lighting fixture types for the room.rvt. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. clear Leader.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. click Tag ➤ By Category. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Next.

The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. 7 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 One by one. 5 Press ESC to end the command. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. for Type Mark. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. Click OK. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. select (Element Properties). under Identity Data. 12 Click OK. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter A. click Duplicate. which you have not yet defined. click Edit/New.

and the tag is updated. select Troffer Corner Insert . 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched. Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. 20 On the Options Bar. select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. in the Type Selector. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. the type is changed. For each lighting fixture. 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. The cursor displays as an eyedropper.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert .Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. click (Match Type). and their tags are automatically updated.

One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. on the Annotation Categories tab. 25 Click OK.rvt. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. Next. select the 2 receptacles in the small room.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. you create electrical circuits with wiring.

The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Create Power Circuit). (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. 3 On the Options Bar. click 4 Select power panel PP-1.2 On the Options Bar.

View conductor information 7 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. click as shown to create arc type wiring. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Power Circuits | 65 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command.5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created.

verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. select the receptacle as shown. under Electrical . 10 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties).Loads. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire. and ground). 13 Press ESC to clear the selection.9 Select the wire shown. neutral. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. 12 Click OK.

16 While pressing CTRL. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The sketch graphics show the circuit. for a total of 8 receptacles. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. 17 On the Options Bar. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. click 19 Select power panel PP-1. click (Create Power Circuit). 18 On the Options Bar.

68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click as shown to create arc type wiring. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created.20 In the drawing area near the created circuit. The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.

click Wire. Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. and click Delete. 24 Type ZR.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the region shown. The wire is deleted. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . 25 On the Design Bar. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. 23 Right-click.

28 Move the cursor to the location shown. press TAB until the graphic displays. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. click to place the end of the wire. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. If the cursor is positioned as shown. If the cursor is positioned as shown. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. click to place the end of the wire. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .26 Move the cursor to the location shown. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. press TAB until the graphic displays.

34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. creating a multi-circuit home run. click Modify to end the command. select Leader. 33 On the Options Bar. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. click Tag ➤ By Category.The two circuits are automatically connected. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run.

38 On the Design Bar. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. click (Panel Schedule Report). Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 37 Click to place the label. scroll down as needed. 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). 35 Click to place the label. Next. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). The Panel Schedule Report view opens. click Modify to end the command. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. The loads are balanced across each phase. A. under Other. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. under Panel Schedule. B. and C. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and click Properties. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 12 Click OK. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . for Appearance on Sheet. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog.4 In the Project Browser. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. right-click PP-1. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. (Edit Circuits on Panel). click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. click OK. click Edit. are shown. click OK. All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. and the current loads on phases. 10 On the Options Bar. click Rebalance Loads.

click No. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 When prompted to save the model.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

go to http://www. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present. After finishing each exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. First. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you design a mechanical system for an office building. At the end of this tutorial. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you configure the linked architectural model. By following the recommended workflow. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. 77 . In this exercise. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this lesson. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. methodology. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will understand the process. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. you first carefully plan the system. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you create the mechanical system. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. as with any design project. Then. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. After applying a color scheme to the zones.

Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. The elevation view opens. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .Mech. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. click Modify.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and double-click East . click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. In this section. click Edit/New. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. select Room Bounding. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you add a level for plenums. The linked model is configured. 6 In the Project Browser. NOTE When working with a linked file. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. and click Element Properties. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. right-click. Next. Open the i Spaces. and click OK twice. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. not in the MEP dataset.

verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. For Offset. verify that 0' 0" is specified. select Level Above (Level 2). Placing Spaces | 79 . and click Edit for View Range. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. and click OK. and press ENTER. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. Click Plan View Types. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. For Cut plane. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. for Top. Scroll down to the Extents category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under Identity Data. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. 9 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 7. for Level. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. In the View Range dialog. click Level. 8 In the Type Selector. and click Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Under View Depth.

Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. under Floor Plans. If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 18 On the Options Bar. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. In the Space box. the 1 . and maximize the window. double-click 1 . The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. Verify that Leader is cleared. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector.Mech. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . click Space. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. New indicates that a new space is being placed. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. For Upper Limit. select Level 1 Plenum. For Offset. verify that New is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. enter 0' 0" .

Later in the exercise. and click Zoom to Fit. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there.20 Click to place the space. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. click to place a space as shown. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. Placing Spaces | 81 . TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. 21 With the Space tool open. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements.

23 Click Modify. 25 Click the space tag name. Next. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office. you rename the 2 spaces. A text box appears. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .

enter 101 in the text box. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. The Interior option displays space shading. and rename the space in the open area. expand Spaces. Open 104. 28 With the view active. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. enter VG on the keyboard. 26 Double-click the space tag number. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). Next. and click in the drawing area. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. Placing Spaces | 83 . and press ENTER. and Reference. Interior. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. and select Color Fill. you activate spaces visibility. 30 Click OK.Enter Office. 27 Repeat this method.

click Space Separation. 33 On the Options Bar. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Chain. and (Line) are selected. For Offset. verify that 0' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw).Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. right-click the Design Bar. To place a space in the entrance area. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click Mechanical. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar.Mech view active. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. 31 With the 1 . enter ZR.

40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area. and after the end point snap displays. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). click to specify the end point for the last line segment. select and drag both of them. The Draw tool remains open. and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. and drag it to the larger open area. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. and after the end point snap displays. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. select the space (reference line) or the space tag. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. click Move to Space.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. Placing Spaces | 85 . NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. 36 Draw the line up. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall.

verify that Leader is cleared. 45 Place the cursor over the space. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. under Identity Data.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter 121. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. Next. click Space. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. do the following: ■ ■ For Number. After the areas are separated. right-click and click Element Properties. For Name. 44 Click Modify. you place a space in the entrance area. enter 0 0 for Offset. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. spaces can be placed in them. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. after the space reference lines highlight. 42 On the Options Bar. enter Entrance.

expand Spaces. This is because the walls prevent space placement. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. 56 On the Options Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level.47 Click OK. select Roof for Upper Limit. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. click Space. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. Chase 118. and enter 0 0 for Offset. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. Placing Spaces | 87 . double-click Level 1 Plenum. 51 Place a space in the chase area. and select Interior and Reference. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. The space is renamed Entrance 121. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. 60 Click OK. click Space. and enter 2 0 for Offset. and click to place a space. 53 Rename the space. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 52 Press Esc. under Floor Plans. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

and you placed spaces for various types of areas. and verify the zones in the System Browser.61 If you want to save your work. that action removes the space from the Default zone. you can choose to save your work. When you add a space to a zone. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. 62 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. close the file. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. you assign spaces to zones in the building. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. enter Spaces Training for File name. Open the i Zones. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and double-click 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. Finally. However. Otherwise. and click Save. click System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.Mech to make it the active view. In this exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating Zones | 89 . and modify the zone properties. 6 On the Zone toolbar. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you assign spaces to a zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. and a new zone is created. After a space is placed in an area. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The Zone tool opens. Next. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. and click View ➤ Zones. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. the Zone toolbar displays. This removes the space from the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. Using the Zone toolbar. it is automatically added to the Default zone. You work with one zone until you click Finish. 7 In the drawing area. As you do this. click Zone.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser.

TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Next. expand HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone. 11 With the Zone toolbar open.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and click OK. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. for Name enter 1 . In the System Browser. 14 Expand the 1 . The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. under Identity Data. 12 On the Zone toolbar. enter VG. click (Zone Properties).West Offices. To view the zone in the drawing area. you rename the zone. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. and click OK.8 Click the space to add it to the zone. 9 With the drawing area active. The new zone displays.

23 On the Zone toolbar. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . click Zone. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you activate zones visibility for the view. and click OK. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. expand HVAC Zones. click Finish. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. 17 With the drawing area active. 24 On the 1 . Next. enter VG.15 On the Zone toolbar. add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. click Finish. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. 27 On the Zone toolbar. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser.Mech floor plan. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. Creating Zones | 91 .Mech to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.

TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. The Zone tool opens. click Edit Zone. under Identity Data. enter 1 . However.You need to rename the zone. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 28 In either view. for Name. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Zone toolbar. Next. and click Properties. and click OK.Open Offices. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Zone Properties). select the reference line to the zone that you created. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. you edit the zone to rename it.

Men’s Room 205. 216 Offices 201. enter Zones Training for File name. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. click File menu ➤ Save.Open Offices 2 . navigate to the folder of your choice.Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it. Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. 203 Chases 118.West Offices Stairwells 2 . 117 Offices 101.North Offices 2 . Ladies’ Room 107. Elec/Mech 206.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. close the file. Otherwise. Ladies Room 207. Spaces Offices 111.Open Offices 1 . 212 Lounge 208. 112. 211. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. Elec/Mech 106. 109. 119. proceed to the next step. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108.South Offices 2 . L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215. In this exercise. You can expand the 1 . 213 Conference 214 Offices 210.Conference Room 2 . 110 Open 104.East Offices 2 . 102. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. 120 Zones 1 . and click Save.Entrance 1 . 116. 32 On the Zone toolbar.North Offices 1 . Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . 103 Stairwells 114. You activated zone visibility in the views. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. Office 209 Open 204. 202. click Finish. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. 35 In the Save As dialog. Men’s Room 105.East Offices 1 .South Offices 1 .

7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the next exercise. Open the i Zone Color Scheme. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties.Mech to make it the active view.in the System Browser. right-click the Design Bar. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. 4 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. and click to place the legend.Mech view. and click Drafting. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. click Color Scheme Legend. Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. and double-click 1 . 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 .

For Postal Code.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. click the Training Files icon. ■ Click for Location. and click Save. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. proceed to the next step. 9 If you want to save your work. enter 03101. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Level 1 Plenum. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type.8 For additional practice. space. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. Open the i Energy Analysis. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 10 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. you verify the building. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. and zone information. select Manchester. NH for City. and view the loads report.Mech. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. click Edit for Energy Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. Revit MEP stores this information as project information.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . you need to select this option. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate.Single Duct is selected. click Edit for Energy Data. and click OK. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. verify that Office is selected. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. NH is selected. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. Then. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . You have verified the building information. verify that VAV . under Energy Analysis. select Level 1. click Heating and Cooling Loads. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Place and Location. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). For Building Construction. verify that <Building> is selected. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Ground Plane. verify that Manchester. Click OK twice. Next. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). Default Space Construction.

and zoom the model to better view the space. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. spin the model as shown. 12 Click (Highlight). you isolate a space. click the Spaces/Zones tab. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. The space for Office 111 highlights in red. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.East Offices zone. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. 11 Expand the 1 . The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. pan. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. and select Office 111.View a space 8 In the preview pane. Next.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. click Shading.14 With Office 111 selected. select Office 111. you view the volume of the space differently. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. 16 On the View Selector . 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. the space information displays for the selected space. 18 Next. 17 Using the methods that you learned. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Office 111. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Below the list of spaces and zones. roofs. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. you verify space information. floors. click (Isolate). NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and other room-bounding components. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .

These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. This zone contains 3 spaces. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. and clicking Element Properties. heating air temperature. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog.East Offices. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. 25 Click 1 . Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. and air changes per hour.East Offices. right-clicking. you verify the zone information. 74. and dehumidification set point. 1 . and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. outdoor air per area. the zone information displays for the selected zone. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. select 1 . including Office 111. This specifies the cooling set point. and humidification set point. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. 70. Below the list of spaces and zones. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 .00 °F : 54. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the heating set point. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information.East Offices. respectively. 23 As you did earlier. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . This specifies the outdoor air per person. <Default> is specified for People Data. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). Next.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type.00 °F : 90. and verify the space and zone information. use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. cooling air temperature.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. view other spaces and zones in the building model. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. click Wireframe.

This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Now that the project. Otherwise. or zone information. pan. click File menu ➤ Save. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. and a loads report displays. you verified building. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. This product is not included with Revit MEP. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and zone information for the building model. or make any changes to the model. 31 In the Save As dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). space. the People Data option becomes blank. click Calculate. space. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. space. For example. that information does not display. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building.You may need to spin. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. In the next lesson. and zone information. 30 If you want to save your work. and click Save. weather. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. building. In this exercise. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . space. or import the IES model that has already been created. You must have IES <VE> installed. 29 Review the loads report. and zone information has been verified. this report includes project. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. close the file.

In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. and then you validate your air system design. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Open the i Air Terminals. adding AC units. sizing ductwork. 101 . and click View Properties. you create new views. you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. As you place the air terminals. You can also select the 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and double-click 1 . Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. click the Training Files icon.

select Supply Diffuser . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. enter 0 for Offset. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. 6 Click OK twice. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. click Air Terminal. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. For example. 10 On the Options bar. for the Cut plane parameter. 5 In the View Range dialog. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. and enter 8 7 for Offset. for the Top parameter. 9 In the Type Selector. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. for the Level parameter. under Graphics.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. Under Primary Range.Ceiling Mech is the active view. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. separate the value with a space. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". make sure that Place on Face is selected. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value.

enter 300 CFM for Flow. TIP When you click Modify. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. then select Multiple. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . you may have to move it to center it -. 14 On the Options Bar. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). TIP To use the Move tool.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. 19 On the Options Bar. click to specify the move start point. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. click Modify. and then click Modify. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. Since snaps are not available here. the command in progress terminates. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.

23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). listening dimensions display to aid placement. select Exhaust Diffuser . Notice that after you specify the copy start point. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Air Terminal. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. 22 In the Type Selector. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only.Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser.

Placing Air Terminals | 105 . select Return Diffuser . and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Using the same placement method.Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser.

28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. clear the UpArrow check box. and click OK.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. right-click.

32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. click on the Edit toolbar.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. After you place the supply air terminals. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal.Ceiling Mech the active view. create the level 2 supply system. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. Placing Air Terminals | 107 .

In this exercise. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. You will be using different views to design the systems. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the air systems. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. modified the air terminal parameters. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. navigate to the folder of your choice. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and learned a method for precise placement. 33 If you want to save your work. click the Training Files icon. In the next exercise. 34 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. click File menu ➤ Save. More importantly.■ In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. and click Save. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. specify the same view parameters as 1 . The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project.

Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 While pressing Ctrl. Verify that Formula is selected. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Air Flow for Type. select Air Terminals. select Flow. 5 Under Select available fields from. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. 4 Add Mark and System Type. Select HVAC for Discipline.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. select Space. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select the field and click Remove.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. under Available fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. click Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. do the following: ■ Under Category. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value.

Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in the Fields list. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. select Actual Calculated Airflow. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. and Itemize every instance is selected. 11 Click OK. and select Supply Air. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. Click OK twice. Select Footer. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Conditional Format. equals. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. On the Filter tab. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and Count and totals. Select Blank line. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. Click OK.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. Next. select System Type for Filter by. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Select Not Between for Test. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule.

Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. NOTE If a different project is also open. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. and press Tab. 23 On the Options bar. speeds the design process. 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Enter ZR. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. 22 Select By Category. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. rather than one by one in a drawing. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. click Leader to clear this option. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. the selected air terminal displays in red. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. 19 In the schedule. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. you create air systems. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. and click View Properties. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. 27 If you want to save your work.Mech to make it the active view. In the next exercise. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you modify the airflow parameters. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This is the power of BIM. During this exercise.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. and maximize the 1 . However. and click Save. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you are changing the air terminal connector size. for the Top parameter. 28 In the Save As dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.Mech floor plan view. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. click File menu ➤ Save. under Extents. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. and double-click 1 . Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and then create the logical connection between the system components. After creating the logical connection. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. Unlike logical connections. Under Primary Range. click Edit for View Range. 26 Close the schedule view. 4 In the View Range dialog. enter an Offset value of 10 0. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to the folder of your choice. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

if all system components are assigned. then press F9.5 Click OK twice. For now. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. air terminals. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. click in the drawing area to make it active. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click System Browser. So. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. If the System Browser does not respond. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. after you placed the diffusers. Thus. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. uncheck Air Terminal tags. enter ZR. and click OK.Mech view. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. As you assign diffusers to systems.

19 On the Options Bar. click (Create Supply Air System). system specific tools display on the Options Bar. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. enter 9 6 for Offset.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. 13 In the Type Selector. IMPORTANT After you select a system component.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . you add the VAV to this system. and press Esc twice. and select the VAV box. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. click to place the VAV box. If desired. do the following: ■ Under Constraints. Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. You created a system that includes the air terminal. select VAV Unit . and click Element Properties. Next. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). click Mechanical Equipment. click (Select Equipment for System). press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.8 inch Inlet. 18 On the Options Bar.

Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. They remain assign to their respective default systems. and cleared from the Options Bar. The organization is from upstream. This display indicates that the new system is selected. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. and select the system. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. select an air terminal that you added to the system. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. and click Select to select the system. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV).

NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Branch. refer to Help. 21 On the Options Bar. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. For more information. and select solution 2. click Settings. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Main. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. Notice that Solutions is selected.Round for Flex Duct Type. click Finish Layout. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. 28 Click OK. ■ Click (Next Solution). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.

and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. thus it is not part of the system. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. On the View Control Bar. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. select Medium for Detail Level. For example. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select Coarse detail level for single line. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. as was the elbow itself. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and press Tab twice. For example. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 .

you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct. If the entire network does not highlight.08 in-wg/100ft. fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. then you know that a disconnection exists.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and enter . under Sizing Method. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and equipment. Rerouting usually correct this issue. 33 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Verify that Only is selected. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . The first time you press Tab. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Click OK. click Sizing. Under Constraints.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. and click to select them.

Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. click to place the VAV box. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select VAV Unit .IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers. click Mechanical Equipment.8 inch Inlet. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. right-click and select Element Properties. and click Element Properties.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . double-click the second VAV box listed. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. enter ZR. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . 36 Click Cancel. 35 With the VAV selected.

the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. NOTE After you select a system component.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. The component highlights in the drawing area. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. enter 9' 6" for Offset. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. click Add To System. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. If not. right-click. and number of elements in the active being edited. and click OK. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. right-click the component in the left column. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. This system includes the selected system component(s). System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. system equipment. 45 Click (Edit System). Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . a new system is immediately created. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. under Constraints. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. and click Select from the context menu. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser.

52 Select the VAV box. click (Select Equipment). Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. the number of elements has increased to 2. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. On the Options Bar. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102.

If you leave the mouse stationary. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2.On the Options Bar. click Finish. 55 Click to select the system. 53 On the Edit System toolbar. The system displays in red. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment.

Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. click Finish Layout. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. and select solution 3. click Layout Path. 57 On the Options Bar. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 .

So. or modify the duct manually. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. click Duct Fitting. and after the end point snap displays. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. click to place the endcap. you can review it and take action if necessary. You can either relocate the VAV box. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. This was the reason for the warning message. If a warning occurs. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. 62 In the Type Selector. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap.

69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. 65 With the VAV selected. click Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and enter . and click to select them. Click OK. right-click and select Element Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. Under Constraints. 68 On the Options Bar. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . 66 Click Cancel. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. under Sizing Method. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Verify that Only is selected. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Do not highlight or select the VAV box.

It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. air terminals.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and press Tab twice. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The VAV box.

sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).Next. and click to place the VAV box.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 72 In the 1 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 . this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. However.8 inch Inlet. click Mechanical Equipment. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. select VAV Unit.Mech view. 75 In the Type Selector.

81 On the Options Bar. and click again to deselect the VAV. 78 Select the VAV. and on the Options Bar. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. The new supply air system displays in red. enter 9' 6" for Offset.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You will add this later. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). and click OK. click (Create Air Supply System). 80 While pressing CTRL. select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. under Constraints. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. click (Element Properties).

place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 82 On the Options Bar.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Click . Next. click (Select Equipment for System). Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. You have logically connected the air system components. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. click to select the system. Then. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. click Modify. 85 On the Options Bar. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. and the red system display cleared. and select solution 1. and press TAB once to highlight the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 .

The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. notice that drag controls display. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. select the left section of the branch. click Finish Layout. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. After you select the branch. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV.87 In the drawing area. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction.

Next. click Finish. The system components are now physically connected. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. mechanical equipment. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. Notice that on the Options Bar. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. select a system component that is already part of a system.The ductwork is created. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. Then. click Add to System. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. The new system component is now part of the same system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). VAV. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. A change has occurred in the air system design. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. the Number of Elements increased to 5. This number verifies the added diffuser.

100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and press Tab twice. 101 On the Options Bar. Click . do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.97 While pressing CTRL. The new ductwork is created. and working from the end of the main. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. click Finish Layout. you need to check that all the parts are connected. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. 99 Zoom out the view. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. and select solution 1. Now that the duct work is in place. 98 With the duct work selected. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. and enter . under Sizing Method. Click OK.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. The selection displays in red. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. Under Constraints. click Sizing. 105 On the Options Bar. Verify that Only is selected. 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog.08 in-wg/100ft. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . and click to select them. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.

Mech floor plan to make it the active view. Next. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. Do not change the duct conversion settings.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. under Mechanical. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. If you receive errors.) 107 In the Project Browser. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. see the note below. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. double-click 1 . modify the duct manually. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . If you receive errors. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. or reinsert duct fittings.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . see the note below. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . Verify that all Other options are cleared. You can either relocate the VAV box. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. So. modify the layout. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.

The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. For VAV airflow. Verify that all Other options are cleared. turn off Air Terminal tags. Do not change the duct conversion settings. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. specify the air terminal airflow. see the note above. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. If you receive errors. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.Mech mechanical floor plan view. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. see the note above. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . If you receive errors. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Next.

it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. After creating each system. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. Although you already checked duct connectivity. and validated the systems in the System Browser. and double-click 1 . sized the ductwork. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system.Mech to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. checked duct connectivity. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. 113 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click File menu ➤ Save. 112 If you want to save your work. You also specified VAV airflow. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In the next exercise. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and the second click specifies the section tail. 8 In the drawing area. and click Properties. enter ZR. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. 6 In the Project Browser. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. After you add the section. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click Section. and click Zoom to Fit. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. The first click specifies the section head. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The section relocates under HVAC. right-click Section 1. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . under Graphics. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. The selected section displays in red. click the section. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. The section head displays in blue. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 10 On the Design Bar. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. select Medium for Detail Level. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. click Modify.

15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. 18 On the View Control Bar. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and click View Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. under Extents. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. Notice that in the 3D view.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. select Section Box. A section box displays around the building model. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . click Modify. and click OK.

25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. 102. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. 21 In the drawing area. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 26 If you want to save your work. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click File menu ➤ Save. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. click Duct. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:).Mech to make it the active view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. select Round Duct : Taps. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.27 In the Save As dialog. and click to specify the start point. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. In the next exercise. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Enter ZR. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. do the following. and click Save. 5 On the Options Bar. and double-click 1 . enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.

Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. After placing the duct. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . right-click on the air connection. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. 9 Click on the VAV.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. and click Draw Duct.

and click to specify the end point.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. TIP When drawing duct. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . If you pause briefly. When drawing duct. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment.

13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. 14 With the Draw tool open. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102. the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. After you click to specify the end point. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. zoom the view to the right of the primary. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. On the View Control Bar. click to specify the start point. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. and after the connector snap displays. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display.

Do not size the primary. specify a 9' 6" offset. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. Check connectivity. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. You will size the primary in a later exercise. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Finally. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". you will do that in a later exercise.) 21 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. On the Options Bar. and Angle is cleared. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV.

24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. and Angle is cleared. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . Check connectivity. Do not size the primary. specify a 9' 6" offset. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . On the Options Bar. You will size the primary in a later exercise. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. and verify that Auto Connect is selected.

you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. click File menu ➤ Save. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. but you have yet to size the primary. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. 26 In the Save As dialog. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. Before sizing the primary. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 If you want to save your work.Velocity. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. Open the i Duct Sizing . navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Training Files icon. While drawing duct. This determines the airflow direction. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. However. In the next exercise. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. and click Save. In this exercise. In this exercise.

IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and double-click 1 . 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. right-click the Design Bar. click Duct Fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and after the end point snap displays.Mech to make it the active view. click to place the endcap. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. 4 In the Type Selector. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 . The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click Mechanical.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser.

9 On the Options Bar. and enter 2500 FPM. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. click Sizing. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. Under Constraints. under Sizing Method. Verify that Only is selected. The selected primary displays in red. and click to select it. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.The sized left primary is shown below. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. So. or reinsert duct fittings. You can either relocate the VAV box. Next. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. and press TAB twice. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. modify the duct manually. modify the layout. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.

The sized right primary is shown below. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. 14 Using the method you have learned. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing.13 Using the process that you just learned. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech to make it the active view. As in level 1. and double-click 2 . the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run.) 15 In the Project Browser. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.

enter 1 . enter Duct Sizing . you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise.Mech. and click OK. 20 In the Save As dialog. 19 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise.Mech. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to the folder of your choice. right-click Copy of 1 . right-click 1 . First. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. and click Rename. you sized the primary duct for the building.Mech is created and becomes the active view.Mech Duct Classes for Name. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click File menu ➤ Save.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. Like room color scheme. click the Training Files icon. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . 2 In the Project Browser. Then. Open the i Duct Color Scheme.Velocity Training for File name. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. and click Save.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. click to specify the end point.26 Move the cursor over the primary. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . The left primary is connected to the AC unit. and after the centerline snap displays.

and place the cursor over the end connector. 30 In the 2 . 32 Drag the connector down and to the right.Next. 31 Select the right primary duct. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point.Mech view. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.

36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view.33 Select the right primary duct. 35 With the draw tool still active. 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. right-click and select Draw Duct. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser .

you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected.Mech view. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 .Mech view. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. click Duct Fitting. zoom in on the duct riser. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. 41 In the Type Selector. However.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. 44 In the Type Selector.. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open. click to add the endcap. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow.

and then validate its geometry.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. click to add the endcap. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 49 Using the 2 views. verify the duct riser endcap. 48 In the 3D view. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.

53 On the Options Bar. 51 With the 2 views tiled. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Create the high pressure supply air system. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2.Mech view to make it active. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 . 54 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click in the 2 .50 Press Tab to check connectivity. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. and then select Mechanical Equipment. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next. click Check None.

and select the level 2 AC unit. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . or even without ductwork. all system components must be logically connected by a system. In this case. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active.the current view are selected. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. 55 On the Options Bar.Mech view range. However. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool.

click Inspect. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. This is the system that you just created. diffuser. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. In the Unassigned folder. Supply Air. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . duct fitting. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. The System Inspector tool opens. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. and click Select. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. expand Mechanical. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. Next. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. and click Inspect. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. you inspect the system. click Inspect.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . 60 In the System Browser.Mech drawing area to make the view active.

71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. Click the supply connector. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. Specify the offset to -14' 6". This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. move the cursor down. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. 9' 6". and enter 3' 6". Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. and a 20" height. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. Next.

■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 .Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view.Mech view (if open). Instead of drawing duct. In the 1 . Watch for the centerline snap as shown. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. release the mouse button. and after the edge highlights. select the left primary duct segment. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . and tile it to the left of the 3D view.Mech view. ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. open the 1 .

Validate the system using the System Browser. Use Tab to check duct connectivity.Mech view. and inspect the system with the System Inspector.The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. and remember to zoom the view. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. ■ In the 1 . and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it.

Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. Open the i Checking Air Systems. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. and validated these logical connections. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Check Duct Systems. you check the systems in your project. and for duct sizing. In this exercise. Using tiled windows. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In this exercise. you need to validate them. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. 73 If you want to save your work. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. As you view the warnings. and quickly target those systems that need attention. click the Training Files icon. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. In the next exercise. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. 74 In the Save As dialog.

For example. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. and for duct sizing. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. However. So. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.that are associated with each warning. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. After you assign the system components to a system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. In the System Browser. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. thus assigning the components to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). as a tutorial exercise. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. the duct is now associated with that system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Then. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

Depending on your air systems design. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 8 Right-click Supply Air.The red lines represent the default logical connection. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. navigate to the folder of your choice. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. click File menu ➤ Save. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. otherwise click Close. TIP If you have multiple views open. 6 Using the same methods. 9 Right-click a system. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. In the next lesson. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. and click Save. 10 If you want to save your work. 11 In the Save As dialog. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. In this exercise. You now confirm the systems that you created. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. Checking Air Systems | 187 . You have completed the supply air systems for the building.

188 .

The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. Then. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create hydronic piping systems. a boiler. and the systems to logically connect the system components. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.Mech. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. you create new views in which to design the piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. First. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. pipes. right-click 2 . After completing the air systems lesson.Mech is created and becomes the active view. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. and inspecting the piping system. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. Open the i Creating Piping Views.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. A new view called Copy of 2 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. circulator pump. placing a circulator pump. In this lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 189 .

do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. under Graphics. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". for Level. TIP When entering a value. Next. you do not need to type measurement symbols. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.Piping for Name. right-click Copy of 2 . Under View Depth. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7".Mech. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Edit for View Range. and click Rename. and click OK.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. For example. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. and enter -11' 6" for Offset. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK twice. For Bottom. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. scroll down to the Extents category. and enter -11 6 for Offset. 7 In the View Range dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. enter 2 . verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline.2 In the Project Browser. click view properties. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. you change the view range.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. The 2 . just separate the value with a space. Also notice that 2 .

Piping view. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. you may want to select each component type separately. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. under Filters. On the Filters tab. However. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. they will not filter all system elements needed. you need a define common filter criteria. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. click the Filters tab. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. So.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. 11 Click Edit/New. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. 14 Under Categories. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. Click Apply. Considering this. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. you can add and activate filters. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. Creating Piping Views | 191 . You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. To do this. it will be best to create filters. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Next. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. however. and enter VG. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. and verify that equals is selected. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. Depending on the filter criteria. In this lesson. 12 In the Filters dialog. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. and click OK. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . system type. such as family name. However.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. 15 Under Filter Rules. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. click in the drawing area to make the view active. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. or even a description that you define. Verify that none is selected for And. Select VAV Unit . the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. (New). the system filters are not used. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. select Mechanical Equipment. type name. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by.

16 In the Filters dialog. and click OK twice.Piping view to make it active. Next. click Edit/New. 18 Under Categories. otherwise the filter will not work. and select Air Terminal. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click in the 2 . This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. return. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). click (Properties). 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. you will not see the Description type parameter. select Supply Diffuser . you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. This is because the selected supply. select Description for Filter by. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. you continue to create and define the filters. click Air Terminal. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. Remember. click Air Terminals. and verify that equals is selected. you create a description as the common filter criteria. Because you already entered the description. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. click in the Value column for Description. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. you can select it. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. under Filters. This is the same rule for using formulae. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. under Identity Data. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Options Bar. Next. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. if differences exist in the selected elements. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. then the type parameters will not display. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. 19 Under Filter Rules. 22 In the Type Selector. and enter VG. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. . 30 Click OK twice.Hosted. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. By selecting each air terminal type separately. enter Air Terminal for Description. you must spell both verbatim. For Type. and click OK. 28 Under Identity Data. 26 Click Apply. and click Apply. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. So. Next. return. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. Remember to click Apply.

and select Round Duct for the family name. So. verify that equals is selected. you specify a family and a type name.Round. Category: Ducts. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. Creating Piping Views | 193 . Category: Ducts. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 40 Click OK twice. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. You used this duct to create the duct riser. you activate the filters. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. 34 On the Filters tab. you need to define the filter again. verify that equals is selected. 36 Click OK. This is because you have not added them. you filter duct fittings by system type. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. you add and activate the filters. Category: Ducts. Filter by: Family Name. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air .Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and enter Supply Air for system type name. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. verify that equals is selected. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Next. Flex Ducts . Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Round Ducts. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. click Edit/New. Filter by: System Type. you need a common filter criteria. Filter by: Family Name. Category: Duct Fittings.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. So. 39 Under Visibility. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. And: Type Name. verify that equals is selected. Next. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . If you did not click Apply. click Add. To filter multiple duct fitting types. verify that equals is selected. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. verify that equals is selected. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. select all of the filters that you created. click the Filters tab. Next. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. verify that equals is selected.Duct Fittings. Filter by: Family Name. Category: Flex Ducts. Filter by: Family Name. And: Type Name. create the following new filters according to the specifications. and click OK. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system.

Mech. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level.Piping view. and click Edit for View Range. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. right-click Copy of 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You now define the view properties. The 1 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.Piping for Name. 48 Click OK twice. 42 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 47 In the View Range dialog. and click Rename. 43 Enter 1 . 44 Right-click in the drawing area. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. scroll down to the Extents category. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset. Unlike the 2 .Mech is created and becomes the active view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Graphics. Next.Mech. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. you change the view range. right-click 1 . 46 In the Element Properties dialog.Piping view displays the new view settings. under Primary Range. A new view called Copy of 1 . and click OK. Next. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer.

you will want to validate the geometry. such as halftone architecture. clear Section Box to turn it off. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. Next. If you turn off ducts visibility. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 58 Click OK. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. under Graphics. select all of the filters that you created. As you create the pipe runs. under Extents.for the boiler pipe connection). you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. and click OK. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating Piping Views | 195 . right-click Copy of 3D Mech. click the Filters tab. you will be unable to view the duct riser. 50 In the Project Browser. 57 Under Visibility. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 On the Filters tab. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. and click View Properties. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. ducts. and click Rename. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. right-click 3D. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and to create the level 1 piping system. click Add. You used this duct to create the duct riser.

6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.Piping to make it the active view. You also created filters to display certain system components. In the next exercise. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. and double-click 2 . you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. 4 In the Type Selector. select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. and click Piping. navigate to the folder of your choice.60 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. click Mechanical Equipment. 1 In the Project Browser. 61 If you want to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. you place the radiators and a boiler. click the Training Files icon. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. right-click the Design Bar. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. 62 In the Save As dialog. The duct risers and AC units display in the view.

8 Click to place the radiator. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. and notice that the connectors display. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . except for the windows on the radius wall. To place the radiator precisely under the window.

Next. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. If parameters are blank. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. If the same type of component exists on another level. All level 2 radiators display in red. right-click a radiator. double-click 1 . Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . drag the section tail. then these are different across the selected objects.Piping to make this the active view. and you do not want to include it. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. you modify the radiator flow rate. 13 In the resulting dialog. and click OK. for Flow. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. If so.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. and click Select All Instances. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. under Mechanical Loads. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 12 On the Options Bar. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. you place the boiler. click (Element Properties). Next. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . click Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. watch the listening dimensions. you verify the boiler flow rate. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser.16 Enter ZR. Next. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector.

4 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the Save As dialog. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. In this exercise. 23 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems.Piping to make it the active view. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Training Files icon. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. After creating the logical connection. If the System Browser does not respond. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. you create the supply and return piping systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. and click Save. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. click File menu ➤ Save.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. click in the drawing area to make it active. 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. and click Element Properties. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click System Browser. then press F9. During this exercise. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. 22 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. analyses cannot be performed. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. under Type Parameters. and then create the logical connection between these system components. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 2 . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system.20 In the drawing area. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. right-click the boiler. you create the systems to logically connect the system components.

They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. if all system components are assigned. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. Notice that after you click . each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. As you assign radiators to systems. click it to the supply system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. and click Select All Instances. Thus. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. All level 2 radiators display in red. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. 6 On the Options Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. right-click. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . So. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). 7 On the Options Bar. after you placed the radiators and boiler. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. (Select Equipment for System). and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system.

You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. This display indicates that the new system is selected. all other components are unavailable. and click Select to select the system. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. press Tab. and select the system. Notice that you can select only valid system components. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. you create the return piping system. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. Next. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Thus. The organization is from upstream. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red.

and cleared from the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. expand Piping. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. (Select Equipment for System). and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 9 On the Options Bar. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . right-click. 13 Right-click each category. 11 The return system displays in red. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. So. These listings represent the systems that you just created. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). click it to the return system. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them.

enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan.Piping to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. In this exercise.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Now that you logically connected the piping system components.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. 17 If you want to save your work. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. and double-click 2 . and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. navigate to the folder of your choice. in the next exercise. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs. click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. or even without pipe being drawn. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. In a later exercise. and click Select. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 18 In the Save As dialog.

click Layout Path. you can place the cursor over a radiator. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. and then select Mechanical Equipment. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . press Tab to highlight the system and select it. Notice that the radiators. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Piping view range highlight.Notice that all components that are in the 2 . Creating Pipe Runs | 205 . 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Then. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. the boiler. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.Piping view). click Check None. 5 On the Options Bar.

■ Click (Next Solution). and select solution 4 of 4. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. Enter 1 0 for Inset. It does not reference the architecture. verify that Solutions is selected. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Select a System dialog. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. The system displays in red. ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. then the Select a System dialog will open. You will need to select a system to create the layout. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 8 On the Options Bar. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.

You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). structural beams. or architecture. select Branch. Later in this exercise. refer to Help. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. Next. 14 Click OK. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. verify that Main is selected.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. and other obstacles. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. click Settings. you now modify the layout path. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Using this inset. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Enter -1 3 for Offset. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. For more information. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path.

You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 17 Using the drag control. zoom the view. A drag control displays.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 In the drawing area. The layout path is located under the radiators. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall.

Ignore the no auto-route solution warning.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . click Finish Layout. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.

or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . For example. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and is not part of the system.are automatically inserted. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components.

To turn off hidden lines. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. If a pipe is hidden by an object. select Fine for Detail Level. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. This is caused by the hidden line setting. 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. Creating Pipe Runs | 211 .

So. Additionally. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. On the View Control Bar. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. select Coarse for single line display. and click to select them. Instead of moving the pipe. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Medium for 2-line duct display. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. Next. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The design requires 2 zones.

28 On the Options Bar. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . select 1" for D: (diameter). you modify the supply pipe run diameter.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. Next. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. width. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click to select it. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. If the pipes had different diameters.

If the entire network does not highlight. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. press Tab 3 times. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and equipment. then you know that a disconnect exists. Next. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. fittings. The first time you press Tab.would not display. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection.

After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. This allows you to better see disconnects. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. For pipe conversion settings. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space. Select Perimeter solution 4. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. you can click to select them. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. Next. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run.Piping view. you create the return pipe run.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. Remember. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save.■ In the Layout Path tool. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. 36 In the Save As dialog. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". 35 If you want to save your work. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name.

converted fittings. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. You checked connectivity. corrected disconnects. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building.In this exercise. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 . and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the next exercise.Piping to make it the active view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference.

you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the section tail. After you add the section.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. click Section. The first click specifies the section head. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. click Zoom in Region.

7 On the Design Bar. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 . NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. click Modify. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.

and click Properties. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). right-click Section 3. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. select Fine for Detail Level. The section relocates under Piping. similar to the level heads in the elevation view.The section head and tail display. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. and click OK. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . under Graphics. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View Control Bar. select Piping for Sub Discipline. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.

The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. These connectors connect to the tee fittings. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. place the cursor over the top connector. and after the connectors display.Piping to make it the active view. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. and other aspects of your systems design. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. Next. mechanical equipment placement. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs.

and select the return pipe segment again. Next. 19 Zoom out. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. click (Split). You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. release the mouse button to reconnect it. always connect to pipe segments. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. NOTE When modifying pipe. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. If you split the pipe.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. 21 On the Edit toolbar. and after the fitting end point snap displays. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. you split the supply pipe segment. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. fittings.

You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and press Delete to delete it. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Zoom out the view. you convert a tee fitting. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Next. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. and draw the pipe around the stairs.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe.

27 Select the tee. and then click Modify. right-click and select Delete. 28 Select Trim. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. and after the end point connector snap displays. The new tee has a horizontal. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 33 Zoom out the view. orientation. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor to the left. not vertical. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. 31 In the Type Selector. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow.

36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. click to specify the segment end point. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. 35 Draw the pipe down. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. NOTE When drawing pipe. and after the connector snap displays.

39 Right-click the lower connector.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. The section displays in red. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. If necessary. However. or width and height. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. the pipe diameter. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. 40 In the Type Selector. Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.This activates the Draw tool.

51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. 49 On the Edit toolbar. 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Although this section was used for air systems. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 45 On the View Control Bar. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. click (Split). 48 Zoom in on the stairwell. 52 Using the methods that you learned. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section.Piping to make it the active view. and double-click the section head to open the section view. Otherwise. you may get a false positive result. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector. watch the listening dimensions. 44 Press ESC. select Fine for Detail Level.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 . using the methods that you learned. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. Remember to watch for connector snaps. 53 Again.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them.

click File menu ➤ Save. you used the Split. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). Open the i Connecting Boiler.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. In this exercise. Draw. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the start point. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Then. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. Remember that after you create pipe. 55 If you want to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. navigate to the folder of your choice. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. and offset are automatically specified. the pipe type is also matched. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. preferably a connector snap. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. click the Training Files icon. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. diameter (or width and height). Using these 2 methods. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. 56 In the Save As dialog. (2) Connect to a snap. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. In the next exercise. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Using Create Similar. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). and click Save.

click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. TIP When tiling 2 views. Connecting the Boiler | 231 .Piping to make it the active view. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. the active view is the only open window. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. Note that if this option is unavailable. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. 3 In the Project Browser. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. You will design in the 2 . This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. the active view is tiled to the left.

9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and after the connector snap displays. Enter -5 0 for Offset. click Pipe. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. 10 In the Type Selector. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. watch the listening dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected.8 Zoom in on the boiler. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the left. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector.

TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. zoom the view and try again. In a later exercise. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. after listening dimensions display. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". Connecting the Boiler | 233 . TIP When drawing pipe. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display.) to separate snap increments. 10' 9" from level 1. and click to specify the end point. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. 16 On the Options Bar. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. enter -1 3 for Offset.

and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. click to specify the pipe segment end point. The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after the connector snap displays. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. release the mouse button to connect to it.

Connecting the Boiler | 235 .The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it.Next. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. 24 With the windows tiled. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. select the tee to display the connectors. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. and the start point is automatically specified. 30 Zoom in on the tee. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. 34 Draw the pipe up.Piping view to make it active. enter 3 0 and press Enter. 31 In the Type Selector. 32 On the Options Bar. right-click the right connector. and after listening dimensions display. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.28 In the 3D Piping view. 29 Click in the 2 .

238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. enter -1 3 for Offset. connect the right supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. In a later exercise. click to specify the end point. 36 With the Draw tool activated. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run.

39 Check connectivity. Connecting the Boiler | 239 .The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 40 Validate the pipe geometry.

This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. and right-click the return connector. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 47 Draw the pipe to the left. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). Next.Piping the active view. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. 42 Select the boiler. and that Auto Connect is selected. 45 Move the cursor up. and click Draw Pipe. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 46 On the Options Bar. click the specify the end point. zoom in on the boiler.Next. and the 2 . enter -1 9 for Offset. and enter 0 4 and press Enter. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 43 In the Type Selector. 44 On the Options Bar.

click to connect to the left return pipe run.48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 . and after the connector snap displays.

49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. and click to specify the end point. right-click the right connector. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click Draw Pipe. 52 Select the tee fitting. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned.

Connecting the Boiler | 243 . click to specify the end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run.

and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed.55 Using the method that you learned.

59 With the 2 . 60 On the Tools toolbar.58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. in the 2 . Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. Connecting the Boiler | 245 . If the Tools toolbar is not available. click (Align). Next. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. select the reference point where you want to align.Piping view. First. and after highlights. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. and then you select the point to align. click to specify the alignment reference point. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process.

click to specify the point to align. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe.NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. 246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. click File menu ➤ Save.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. For pipe offset. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. 17 In the Save As dialog. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. 15 Using the methods that you learned. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. 3D. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. and fin-tube radiators. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. circulator pumps. 16 If you want to save your work. and click Save. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. In this exercise. a boiler. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. In this tutorial. Depending on your air systems design. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. the creation and modification methods remained the same. In the lesson. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. Finally. For additional practice. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. Design the system in the 1 . it is a valid system without problems. and section views.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. navigate to the folder of your choice.

Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. parametrically modify those designs. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems.connections and creating logical systems. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). Explore different system designs.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files.

268 .

In this lesson you specify electrical settings. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. However. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. 269 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work.rvt. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog.autodesk. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. click Reload From. if the link is lost. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. go to http://www. and select i Office Building. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. After finishing each exercise. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. If the tutorial datasets are not present.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. In this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.

rvt. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Later. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. For this reason.The electrical settings determine the voltages. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. in the left pane. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. Lighting. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the right pane. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. the Limit Offset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and demand factors that you will use in your project. click Add (below the table). the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. and demand factors that are applied in the design. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. power distribution systems. wiring. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. 3 Click Wiring Types. distribution systems. wiring. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. expand Wiring. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. For example. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. click the Training Files icon. power.

00 V Maximum 130.00 V 460. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 200.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00V 260. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120. For example.00 V 490. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 208.00V 280.00 V 480. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 .00 V 220. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.00 V 220. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1. By specifying a range.00V 277.00 V 240. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00 V 250.

7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. For example. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 8 In the right pane. click Distribution Systems. even though this is physically impossible.

leave the default settings as shown here. at any given time. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. Red. For example. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. For this exercise. You can specify one or more Demand Factors.000VA 10. HVAC. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range.000VA 3.000VA. this type of system (High.000VA 10. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . or Other systems in your project based on their load. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4.000VA. 10 Click OK. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. Power. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. 9 Click Demand Factors.

19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. In this case the key style is the type of space and. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. containing several switch types. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. distribution systems. and demand factors. 12 In the Open dialog. 14 Using the same method. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . expand Families.480-208Y120 . and established the parameters for your wiring. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. restrooms. voltages. Later. selected components for your electrical systems.rfa. and click Open.Surface. conference rooms. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. As an alternative. has also been added under Lighting Device. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. and load Duplex Receptacle. 13 Select Lighting Switches. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.Surface. 16 In the Project Browser.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. you can load from the components from that location. 15 Click Open. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. 20 You can save the open file if you wish.208V MLO . As you loaded each of the component families.NEMA Type 2. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274.rfa.rfa family. 17 Using the same method.rfa. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In this exercise. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.rfa 18 Using the same method. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices. and load Dry Type Transformer . and so on). 21 Click File menu ➤ Close.480V MCB .

2 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Illuminance. click to select the space. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. 4 Click OK twice. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project. For Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical .rvt. select Electrical. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog.Open the provided dataset. click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.Lighting to make it the active view. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as described below. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and when the cross-hairs display. Under Parameter Data. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Electrical-Lighting. Select Instance. Under Categories. select Spaces. For Group. double-click 1 . 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. click Add. To verify this. For Discipline. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement.

However. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. enter Lighting Levels. one for each type of space in the building. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. 12 Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. Click Schedule keys. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. For Name. 8 Click Cancel. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. enter Space Lighting Requirements. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. For Key Name. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.7 On the Options Bar. Click OK. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. click (Properties). You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting category.

click View Properties and. click . You can change the sort keys for the schedule. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. then right-click. and select Open Office. In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. under Instance Parameters.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. and for Lighting Levels parameter. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . double-click the 1 . in the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Identity Data category. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans.

Lighting 1 .Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . While pressing Ctrl. Level 1 . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule.Lighting 1 . and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc. 21 Using the same method. Office).Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.Lighting 1 . The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting 1 .19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting category. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . then open 2 . then right-click one of the selections. select multiple spaces of the same type (for example.Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK.

Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . if required.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.Level 1 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters.Lighting 2 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.

Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click OK. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. enter Required Lighting. click Edit/New. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. double-click the 1 . Under Title Text. 6 For Color. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate).rvt. Consequently. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. 14 Click OK twice. select Required Lighting Level. as described below. click Color Scheme Legend. Open the provided dataset. for Title. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Underline. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. and place it in the drawing. For Space Type. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Show Title. select Spaces. and click Element Properties. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 7 Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule.according to space type. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. select Spaces for Category. For Color Scheme.

activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases.16 Make the 2 .5 fc range specified in the schedule. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. as described below.Lighting floor plan the active view. but only one per view.Lighting. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. You can have more than one color scheme in the project. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 Using the same method. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise). 18 You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Number. For Discipline. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Click OK.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Name. scroll down the Available fields list.Required Lighting Level.rvt. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. click the Training Files icon. For Type. select Electrical. select Spaces. select Illuminance. For Formula. click Calculated Value. enter Lighting Delta. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Average Estimated Illumination . 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Verify that Ascending is selected. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

14 On the Formatting tab. For Rounding. 11 Click the Background Color chip. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. verify that Fixed is selected. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . 9 Click Conditional Format. For Test. 12 In the Color dialog. under Basic colors. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. under fields. 13 Click OK twice. 18 Click OK. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. select Ceiling Reflectance. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. For Value. For Units. 16 Click OK. click the red color chip.8 On the Formatting tab. under Fields. and click Field Format. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. select Not Between. select 2 decimal places. select Lighting Delta. 17 Using the same method. select Lighting Delta.

Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. As a result. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. This is because the value is not within the +/. Only the Number. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Floor Reflectance. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. NOTE Right-click a heading. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. Open the provided dataset. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. Average Estimated Lighting. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. However. expand Schedules/Quantities. as described below. Name. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. In this exercise. and make connections to electrical equipment. and these areas will not be lighted. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. you will create power and lighting circuits. there is no required lighting level specified. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. Wall Reflectance. As you select and place lighting fixtures. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Once the equipment is in place. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. click the Training Files icon.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. electrical equipment.

7 On the Windows menu. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. click Lighting Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. click Tile. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . double-click 1 . 6 In the Project Browser.Ceiling Elec view. click Close Hidden Windows. 8 In the 1 . and arrange the windows as shown. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan.4 On the Windows menu. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

and when Endpoint displays. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. and click when Intersection displays. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. click to specify the start point. click (Move). 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. select it. 286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .12 Click Modify. and on the Toolbar.

as shown.5 fc. select Multiple. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. click 17 On the Options Bar. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. and on the toolbar.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. (Copy). and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 .

and in the Type Selector. Point by point analysis is not currently supported. 102.Ceiling Elec. but is still not within the +/. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. To adjust the illumination level downward. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 .5 fc range. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. If you select a component inadvertently.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc.

You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.Ceiling Elec and 2 . Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. and go on to the next exercise. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 . and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished.21 Again. The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.5 fc range. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. 22 Using the same method.Ceiling Elec views.

and click Unhide All Columns. right-click one of the headings. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. 4 Click OK twice. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. click Device. as described below. click (none). turn off the color scheme on level 2. 9 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. and click Properties. click the Training Files icon. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. click in the Value column for Color Scheme. double-click 1 . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. Open the provided dataset. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291.Lighting. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans.rvt. In this exercise. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. 8 In the Type Selector.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. right-click 1 . Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click to place the switch. 5 Using the same method.Lighting to make it the active view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and in the Type Selector. and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting view as shown. click Device.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . select Lighting Switches : Three Way.

16 In the Type Selector. select Lighting Switches : Four Way.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. as shown. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 .

21 On the Design Bar. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown. double-click 2 . and in the Type Selector. 20 In the Project Browser.Lighting to make it the active view. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. click Device. 19 Click Modify. 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Lighting Switches : Three Way.18 In the open office area.

and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. click Device. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . in the Type Selector. and go on to the next exercise. placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. as shown. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell.

Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles.Power to make it the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 .Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. as described below. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. click the Training Files icon. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . scroll down and. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. under Instance Properties. 10 Using the same method. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. 15 In the left side of the plan. and click Edit. on the Model Categories tab. click Device. right-click 2 . verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. and click Properties. 7 In the View Range dialog. for Top. under Instance Parameters. 14 On the Options Bar. under Primary Range.Power. 8 Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Selector. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. and for Offset. 9 In the Project Browser. enter 10' 0". 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. scroll down to View Range. select Associated Level (Level 1). and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.Power plan view. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 5 Click OK. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default.Power. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . 20 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Device. (Place on Work Plane). click for Plane.2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. double-click 1 . 19 In the Type Selector.

its connector is located below the level of the work plane. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .22 Click Modify. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. click . (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. as shown. In the next steps. 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. as shown. it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. 24 On the Toolbar. click (Copy).

28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. as shown. . and to the left of the men’s restroom. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 . place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. as shown. and click on the Options Bar.

302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Power. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Power floor receptacles. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303.30 Using the same procedure. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. open 2 .Power view. place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 . TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . Select all 1 .Power view.Power as shown. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. then copy and paste them in the 2 . 31 You can save the open file if you wish.

It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. With the introduction of local energy codes. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. as described below. click the Training Files icon. under Available Fields. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down the Category list. and for Name. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. Open the provided dataset. and select Spaces. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 4 Click OK. enter Power & Lighting Usage. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 .rvt. because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. and work toward the higher voltage. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment.7 You can save the open file if you wish. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 9 Proceed to the next exercise. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

Power. for Distribution Sys.Loads. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel.rvt. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Electrical Equipment. as described below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. Right-click the panel. under Electrical . Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. scroll down to the Electrical . and for Panel Name. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. under Instance Parameters. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. 4 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. 11 In the Type Selector.Surface : 250A. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. and double-click 1 .Loads category. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Element Properties. select 480/277 Wye.Open the provided dataset. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. select Electrical Equipment. and click to place the panel as shown.

Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . 21 On the Options Bar. click . and on the Options Bar. and for Panel Name. for Distribution Sys. enter T1. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 20 Select the panel you just placed. under Instance Parameters. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click .Loads category. enter L-1. select 120/208 Wye. under Instance Parameters.Loads category.Surface : 100A. 14 On the Options Bar. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. 23 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Electrical Equipment. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. 16 Click OK. Since this is a transformer. for Distribution Sys. scroll down to the Electrical . 19 Click Modify. select 480/277 Wye. 18 In the Type Selector. For Panel Name. select 120/208 Wye.

Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. 27 Click (Select Panel). In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. 26 On the Options Bar. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. and click 30 On the Options Bar. The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . click as shown. . A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. 28 On the Options Bar. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. 29 Select the transformer T2. select panel L-2. and select panel H-2 for Panel. click (Create Power Circuit).Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. . add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

. and click 39 Click . 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. click . select the H-2 panel. and select the MDP panel. 38 On the Options Bar.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. click 35 On the Option Bar. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. and on the Options Bar. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. 37 Close the 2-Power view. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . . A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. select the L-1 panel. 34 In the 2-Power view.

and data systems. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as described below. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Circuits are used for power. and select the MDP panel. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . and click 41 On the Options Bar. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. . You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. click . 42 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. lighting. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).40 Select the T1 transformer.

For now. and voltage (120 V). 4 On the Options Bar. 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise.rvt. and double-click 1 . Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 3 While pressing Ctrl. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office.■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. load (180 VA). select all the receptacles in the corner office. 1 In the Project Browser. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit.Power to make it the active view. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. click .

9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. and click to select the circuit again. and press Tab. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. click for this circuit. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. 6 Click Modify.

and ground wiring. click (Edit Circuit). all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. 1-#12. which are the wire sizes for the load.10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 1-#12. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. change the value from 20A to 50A. The editable parameters. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. Wire Type and Rating. respectively for this circuit. neutral. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. will be discussed in a later exercise. 1-#6. The currently specified values are 1-#12. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 11 On the Options Bar. click (Circuit Properties). 1-#10. When editing a circuit.

.Loads category.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. under Instance Parameters. creating power circuits. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. and click Element Properties. and try to select panel L-1. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. scroll down to the Electrical . 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. click . zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. click The circuit is created. click Cancel. as previously described. 19 Close the warning message. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and add it to panel L-1. and then select panel L-1. 22 Click OK. click . NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Continue creating circuits. and select panel L-1. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. If you select L-1 in the drawing. 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. click . 17 Continue selecting receptacles. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. click . Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. These will be connected in a later exercise. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well.

you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and on the Options Bar. 29 Select the L-1 panel. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. These will be connected in a later exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. you have assigned only 17. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. create circuits in the 2 .Power to make it the active view. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time.27 Using the same procedures. As you saw in the previous exercise. click (Edit Circuits on Panel).Power view and assign them to panel L-2. 30 Click OK. In the Edit Circuits dialog. 28 Double-click 1 . Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Finally.

13 In the Filter dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. for Level. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply View Template. click Edit in the Value column. and for Offset. under Names. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. for Top. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. select Electrical Plan .rvt. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. as described below. for View Range. select Level Above. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Associated Level. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. under View Properties. double-click 1 . enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. Click 3 In the right pane. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Open the provided dataset. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. select Lighting. select Electrical Lighting Plan. and click OK. in the Value column.Lighting. select <all>. For Names. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. and in the New View Template dialog. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. and for Offset.Lighting to make it the active view. right-click 1 . Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. select Associated Level. click (Filter). and for Offset.

16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. click . This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A).14 On the Options Bar. 15 Close the message window and. 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.

Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 .17 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. click . you created arc type wiring. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. Later. click . click (Filter). neutral. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . In this step. and click OK. or floors. lighting fixtures. press Tab. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. ceilings. when you create wiring manually. click Check None. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. and click the switch to select the switches. as in this step. select Wires. When creating wires. 21 In the Filter dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. you can specify splined wiring. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. but with an additional vertex. Splined wiring is similar to arc. ground) in the wire run. click circuit.

under Instance Parameters. and click OK. click . 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and click OK. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices.22 On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. enter 2. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. When this occurs. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. right-click the MDP panel. for Hot Conductors. 24 Using the same method. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. enter 2 as the value. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. and one ground conductor).Loads category. under Instance Parameters. 25 In the Mech/Elec space. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. one neutral conductor.

close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 30 Right-click panel H-2. and click OK. 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. and restrooms in the 2 . scroll down to the Electrical .Loads category. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . Creating Switch Systems on page 320. lounge.Lighting view. then creating lighting circuits in 2 . Otherwise. conference room. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit.Lighting view. assign the circuit to panel H-2.29 For more practice. and assign each circuit to panel H-2. and in the Element Properties dialog. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2.Lighting. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . These will be connected in a later exercise. under Instance Parameters.

assign lighting fixtures to switches. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs.Lighting to make it the active view. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1 . 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . as described below.33 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. fixtures. click the Training Files icon. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. and specify switch IDs for switches. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. but does not prevent you from doing so. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. and panel information. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project.

(Remove From System). (Edit Switch System). With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. 3 On the Options Bar. TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . Then. and click to select everything in the system. click Multiple. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. press Tab. After creating the switch system. and on the Options Bar. click (Create Switch System).2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). on the Options Bar. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. 5 With the switch system still selected. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. 6 On the Switch System toolbar. click Finish to confirm your selections. 4 Click (Select Switch for System).

enter North Stairwell . click . enter Main Entrance . (Switch Properties). 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. for Switch ID. and click OK. under Instance Properties. 9 Click (Switch Properties). click Finish. 11 On the Switch System toolbar. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . (Select Switch). The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Instance Properties. click Finish.West. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Switch ID. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. click outside the ladies’ restroom. The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar.1st Floor.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 15 Click 16 Click .

create switch systems for the remaining private offices. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Finish. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. 20 Click . Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. and for Heading. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . scroll down the Available fields list. select Spaces. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and restrooms in the 1 . select Number from the Fields list. stairwell.18 On the Switch System toolbar. select Number. and on the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. 26 On the Formatting tab. For Name. enter Switch Systems. enter Space Number. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click .Lighting view. Verify that Ascending is selected. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories.

Create separate systems for the lounge. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice.Lighting view. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . scroll down the Available fields list. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. 30 For more practice. restrooms. Otherwise. conference room.2nd Floor for the switch ID. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . Specify Open Area . The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. and private offices. The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise.

and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Using the same method. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the corner office. Open the provided dataset. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. and double-click 1 .Power to make it the active view. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan.

7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. 9 On the Options Bar. click Wire. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and delete both home runs.

11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire. as shown. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 .

As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. When completed. when the wiring is completed. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. and using the same method. if necessary.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible. The direction will be corrected.

and click. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. and a shared safety ground). In the previous steps. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. 17 Right click the wire run. select Insert Vertex. a shared neutral.number of hot conductors. 14 Click Modify. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office.

19 For additional practice. Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . The wire behaves like a spline.Power views.Power and 2 . or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.

Checking Your Design | 331 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click 1 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design.rvt.Power to make it the active view. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 1 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. as described below. In this exercise. Checking Your Design on page 331. Open the provided dataset. click the Training Files icon.

2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 7 In the System Browser. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. and click Select. each with a load of 180VA. 5 Right-click a column heading. release the mouse button. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. 8 In the System Browser. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1.

This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. collapse Power.Lighting views and close any windows.The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 . 10 Open the 1 . 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell.Lighting and 2 . and expand Unassigned.Power. Checking Your Design | 333 . Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP).

17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 . 13 In the 1 . Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. until the power circuit is previewed. (Add to Circuit).Lighting view. and on the Options Bar. click create permanent wiring.The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . clear Multiple. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. click Finish. click . press Tab several times.Lighting view.Lighting view have not yet been connected. click to select the circuit. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. and on the Options Bar. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. In the System Browser. click 15 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar.

Checking Your Design | 335 .Lighting view. for Hot Conductors. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. 26 On the Options Bar. and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 21 In the Filter dialog. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. and click OK.Lighting view. In the System Browser. enter 2. click 27 On the Options Bar. select Wires. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. 22 Click . click Check None. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. select panel L-1. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. 19 In the 1 . press Tab. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. click the title bar of the 2 . and click OK. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. under Instance Parameters. 25 In the drawing area. click .Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. .

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

32 Click to view details of the warning.29 Using the same method. click Check Circuits. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. Checking Your Design | 337 .

This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. In the Project Browser. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Power. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 34 Close the Warning dialog. Finally. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. as described below. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. and double-click 2 . Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close.

and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B.4500 VA. click Rebalance Loads.4320 VA). The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . B. and Phase C provides 3780 VA. 5 Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. and Phase C . 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Examination of the loads on Phase A. while Phase A provides 4860 VA. select panel L-2.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. click . Phase B 4860 VA.

This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. After the loads are balanced. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. you may see different values for the loads. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. L-1 and MDP. so no further changes are required.Power. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. double-click 1 . and the T1 transformer.6 Select panel H-2. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. and present a load 6496 VA. enter 40A for the Trip value. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. . 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. H-2 is a 100A panel. the H-2 panel. Therefore. enter 100A for the Trip value. select the T1 transformer. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. and on the Options Bar. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. you can use a 30kVA transformer. and on the Options Bar. and for T1.Power view. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. 14 In the Type Selector. click 8 In the Project Browser. and present a load of 12960 VA. Therefore. 13 In the 1 . the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. 12 Click OK. for panel H-2. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. click .

for transformer T2. 1-#12.00A. under Instance Parameters. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. click (Circuit Properties).Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 100.Power to make it the active view. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. enter 100A for Rating. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click OK. 23 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. 17 Click OK. 22 Click OK. 27 In the 2 . select the T2 transformer.Power view. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. on the Options Bar. 18 With panel L-1 selected. enter 40A for the Trip value. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. select panel H-2. 1-#8.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 1-#1. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. 21 Scroll down. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. double-click 2 . 1-#12. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. and click Element Properties.

30 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. double-click 1 . under Electrical Loads. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 34 Close the Warning. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. 35 On the Options Bar. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. click . scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately.Power to make it the active view. 33 With the MDP panel selected. click . 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. This completes the Electrical Tutorial.00A. 31 Click OK. under Instance Parameters.

it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. including plumbing fixtures. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. and sanitary piping. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. 343 . However. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. By following this workflow. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009. and select i Office Building. In this tutorial. hot and cold water piping. After finishing each exercise. if the link is lost. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. As you create the plumbing system. If the tutorial datasets are not present. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. you will understand the process.autodesk. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. At the end of this tutorial. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. methodology.rvt. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. click Reload From.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. However.

planning is critical to a successful design. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems.rfa 5 Click Open. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. click the Training Files icon. In this lesson. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. click the Training Files icon. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet .Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Flush Valve . 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa Urinal . you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families.Wall Hung.Floor Mounted. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

3 Right-click PVC 2.Flush Valve . click Rename. All of the loaded families.rfa 11 Click Open. and click Properties.PVC .Wall Hung. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The selected component families are loaded into the project. 2 Right-click PVC. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. select Pipe Transition . 6 Under Mechanical. are added under Families in the Project Browser. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. select Pipe Cross . select Tee For Tee.6 In the Project Browser. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard For Tap. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Sanitary .DWV . and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Glued. and click Duplicate.Glued: Standard For Transition. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . for New. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Pipe Bend . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select Pipe Short Tee . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise.Glued. enter PVC Sanitary.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type.Floor Mounted and Urinal . 5 In the Rename dialog. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345.Sanitary . 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend . select None For Cross.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346.rvt. 8 In the Name dialog. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. enter PVC Sanitary Vent.PVC . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Vent .PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. select Pipe Coupling . you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. you add 2 toilets. verify that Pipe Cross . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 urinals. 9 Under Mechanical. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut.Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. for Name. ZR (Zoom Region).PVC: Standard For Tap. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. 3 sinks. In this lesson.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. verify that Pipe Bend .PVC: Standard is selected For Union. 11 You can save the open file if you wish. verify that Pipe Coupling . select Pipe Tee . you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. then click Duplicate. You then modify the piping. click the Training Files icon. verify that Pipe Transition . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.■ For Union. select None For Cross. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. verify that Tee is selected For Tee. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click OK. Finally.

a On the Design Bar. and 1' 6" from the right wall. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. click Plumbing Fixture.6 gpf in the Type Selector. 6 Click Modify. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and 3 sinks.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Floor Mounted : Private 1. click Dimension. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown.Flush Valve . 4 Select Water Closet . 3 wall-mounted urinals.

and click. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. click 9 On the Options Bar.b On the Options Bar. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . d Move the cursor down. e Using the same method. c Click the face of the right wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). g Select the toilet. and Individual References is selected for Pick. enter 0' 6". Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. verify that (Aligned) is selected. and on the Edit toolbar. enter 1' 6". click the value for the blue dimension to the right. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. i Click Modify. and press Enter. and press Enter. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. j Delete both dimension annotations. and click to place the dimension annotation. move the cursor over the center of the toilet. f Click Modify. The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall.

and click. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. 18 Move the cursor down. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. 19 Using the same method. click to place the toilet as shown. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. do the following. and on the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . click Plumbing Fixture. click Dimension. 13 Select Urinal .Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. and click to place the dimension annotation. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. and on the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room.

Single : 18"x18". 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. click Plumbing Fixture. click the value for the blue dimension. Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method.Island . 28 In the drawing area. and click to place the dimensions annotation. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Delete. The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall.20 Working from left to right. 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). and enter 1' 8". and in the Type Selector. 25 While pressing Ctrl. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. then move the cursor up. and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. select Sink . click the centerline of each urinal in succession. select the counter top.

and click to place the floor drain.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. 32 On the Design Bar.3" Drain. and in the Type selector. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Floor Drain . 30 Place 3 sinks. 31 Click Modify. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10".Round : 5" Stainer . click Plumbing Fixture. 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. 35 Delete the dimension annotations. select Level : Level 2. and for Plane. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. click Dimension. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . as shown. then equalize the space between sinks. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). approximately as shown. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6".

You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click View Properties. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view.39 Click Modify. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Edit. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. In this exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 6 On the View Control Bar. click the Training Files icon. under Extents. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. 4 In the View Range dialog. specify Fine for Detail Level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. urinals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and floor drain. scroll down to View Range. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level.

TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. as shown. toilets. click (Create Sanitary System). Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. select Sanitary from the System Type list. 9 In the right panel. 19 On the Options Bar.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click View ➤ Piping. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. click Mechanical Settings. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. and click Main. click Branch. Click Window ➤ System Browser. and floor drain. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. The urinals.

enter 1/8" for Slope. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. and on the Options Bar.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. 27 On the Design Bar. click Sanitary 1. click Place Base. select 4". and click OK. and click to place the base approximately as shown. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. 23 In the Select a System dialog. and a preview of the piping layout displays. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. click (Layout Path). and on the Options Bar. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . specify -4' 0" and for D. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Solutions. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. for Offset. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar.

It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. and on the Design Bar. as needed. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . click Modify. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. 29 Select solution 1. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. to view them. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution).Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar.

31 Click Finish Layout. c Using the same method. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location. and drag the segment down into the chase.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click to align the branch to the main segment. This makes it easier to locate a snap. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal.

The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. slope. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. When a fitting is reversed. The third tab should highlight the entire system. The second tab highlights the fixture. and check the slope control. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . checking for the proper connectivity. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. b Select each pipe segment in the system. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. as shown.

and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. VG (Visibility/Graphics). specify Fine for Detail Level. Enter the keyboard shortcut.33 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Show categories from all disciplines. and double-click 3D Plumbing. 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 37 On the View Control Bar. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

40 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines.rvt.38 You can save the open file if you wish. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room.

Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . enter 13. press the Space Bar once.4 Select the tee. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. When you press the space bar. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and on the Options Bar. right-click the connector on the open leg. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. 7 Click Modify. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector.

and when the extension snap displays. 10 Click Modify. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click the blue size control for the wye leg. and when the snap displays. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click to place the fitting. enter 2". click to place the fitting. 11 Select the fitting. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. click Pipe Fitting. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. click Pipe Fitting. and press Enter. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 .If you select the pipe. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet.

and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 16 Select the wye fitting.14 Click Modify. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. highlight the wye. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and on the Options Bar. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. verify that Auto Connect is selected. click to specify the end of the pipe. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Draw Pipe. 15 Using the method learned earlier. right-click the connector on the open leg.

and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . press Space. 24 On the Plumbing tab. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. 21 In the Project Browser.DWV . In this case. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue.20 On the Options Bar.Glued : Standard. enter 0' 6" for Offset. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. If necessary. 22 In the 3D view. and click Modify. click Pipe Fitting. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . click Apply. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. and click to place the fitting. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment.

and for Model Graphics Style.Plumbing to make it the active view.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. to orient the fitting. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. specify 0' 8" for Offset. TIP When entering dimensions. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. 31 On the View Control Bar. 26 Click Modify. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". If necessary. For example. without having to enter ' and " symbols. specify Fine. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. click Section. and in the drawing area. specify Hidden Line. click shown above. place a section below the sinks as shown. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. for Detail Level. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.

press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. click None. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. and click All again d Select any category. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. 41 Click Modify. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. draw the pipe up to the left. click Pipe. and on the Options Bar. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. for Offset. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . 39 Click Modify. in line with the angle for the leg. draw the pipe up. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. specify 0' 6". 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. 37 Using the same method. 36 Click Modify. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall.Plumbing. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 49 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. double-click 3D Plumbing. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain.42 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the end of the pipe. enter 1' 6". and double-click 2 . connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. and select the leftmost sink. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Using the same method. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. and in the Type Selector. 47 Click Modify.

and on the Options Bar. and select a proposed solution. specify 2". for D. 56 While pressing Ctrl. While pressing Ctrl. 54 On the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 57 Select solution 7of 7. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). and on the Options Bar. for D. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. 61 Select the double-wye. 53 While pressing Ctrl. 59 Using the same method. 52 Click Modify. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. 58 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. click Routing Solutions. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. click Routing Solutions. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. You use the proposed solutions.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. specify 1 1/2".

65 On the Options Bar. This is to be expected. 64 On the toolbar. enter 1/8" / 12". A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar.Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . for Slope. and click Finish. Close the warning.

Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. specify the exact Offset. 68 On the Options Bar. 70 In the drawing area. When zoomed in close. click Multiple. and on the Options Bar. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. click (Edit System). click Finish on the Options Bar. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. right-click Sanitary 1. If necessary. and under Instance Parameters. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. click to select the reference end of the pipe. right-click the pipe. expand Sanitary. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment).66 Using the same method. and click Select. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. modifying offset values. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. You can move fixtures by dragging. while pressing Ctrl. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. there is a smaller movement. click Element Properties. (Add to System). 67 In the System Browser. you can make minor adjustments to the system. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. select all 3 sinks. Then. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped.

select Pipe Bend . 75 Using the method learned earlier. 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye.DWV . and in the Type Selector. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments.When the piping was created for the sink drains.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. (After the third tab. the entire system should be highlighted. Now that the routing is completed.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.DWV . you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend . Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard. 73 While pressing Ctrl.Glued : Standard.) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and select Pipe Bend . highlight the leftmost sink.DWV .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. skip the next 2 steps. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. while maintaining the same angle. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. adjusting the sanitary stack. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. otherwise. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. and carefully drag it away from the elbow.rvt. and select the horizontal pipe.76 If you want to save your work. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system.

Glued : Standard. Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and select Pipe Reducing Wye .4 Select the elbow. 5 Select the vertical pipe segment.DWV . 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. and when the Extension snap displays. click Pipe Fitting. and press Delete. and click to place the fitting. 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). specify 6" for D (diameter).

and click the sanitary piping. The wye is added to the vertical segment.8 Click Modify. and press Enter. click Section. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. enter 4 to change its size. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . click the value for the 45 degree leg. select the wye. If necessary.Plumbing. and click Modify. double-click 2 . 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye.

and select the reducing wye fitting. enter -2' 6" for Offset. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. specify Fine. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click to specify the end of the pipe. 14 Zoom in.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. for Detail Level. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays.

select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and on the Options Bar. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. when the location is critical. click Routing Solutions.DWV .Glued : Standard.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. and in the Type Selector. 18 While pressing Ctrl. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . select solution 3 of 3. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. click Draw Pipe. 17 Click Modify. However. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting. 19 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. 23 Click Modify. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals.25 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. then down to connect with the sanitary main. (If necessary. running it inside the wall. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

(Connect Into). 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. click Draw Pipe. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . click to specify the end of the pipe. click the pipe above the urinal. click 13 In the drawing area. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays.3 Press Delete. and click to specify the end of the pipe. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. starting at the level of the original pipe. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. click the connector snap. for Offset. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". 10 Click Modify.

verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. Do not include the riser and fitting. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. 16 In the Filter dialog. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. and on the Options Bar.14 Using the same method. 18 On the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. and click Finish. 19 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. click (Filter Selection). (Slope). double-click 3D.

Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 . 22 On the Options Bar.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. However. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. double-click 2 . specify 3" for D (diameter). first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. So.

32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. and on the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector.Plumbing to make it the active view. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . and on the Options Bar. 24 Select the elbow. 30 In the Project Browser. then select 2". and on the Options Bar. click to place the plug on the tee. specify 3" for D (diameter). select 3". specify 2" for D. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe Fitting. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. for D.Glued : Standard is selected. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again. and when the extension snap displays. double-click 3D.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal.Sanitary . 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North.

Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 .Glued : Standard. and select Pipe Bend . 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.DVW . 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow.

2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. click the Training Files icon. If necessary. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close.36 You can save the open file if you wish. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .rvt. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

specify 2" for D (diameter). 7 Click Apply. VG (Visibility/Graphics).4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. do the following: a Click Edit/New. specify 0" for Rise/12". Adding Vents to the System | 383 . Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and in the Type Selector. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. 6 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 8 Click Modify. and specify 14' for Offset. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. click the Color button. click Rename. c Right-click Sanitary 1. f In the Add Filters dialog.b In the Filters dialog. and click (Duplicate). select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. and click OK. i In the Line Graphics dialog. select Sanitary from the Filters list. 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . click Add. select (green). h In the Line Graphics dialog. and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. click Section. rename the filter Sanitary Vent. for Pattern. g For Sanitary Vent. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. select Sanitary Vent. and click OK.Plumbing to make it the active view. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. d Under the Filter Rules. and click Override. and click OK. and in the Color dialog. click the Lines column.

specify 2" for D (diameter). 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. 17 On the Options Bar. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. 20 At a point above the toilets. specify Wireframe. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. and on the Options Bar. for Detail Level. and for Model Graphics Style. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify Fine. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. click Pipe.

enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe.21 Click Modify. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. b Begin the vertical pipe. for Offset. and click OK. c For D. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. e If necessary. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. f Click Modify. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. under Instance Parameters. and click to make the connection. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . press Tab to display the connector. specify 2". d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays.

27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.Plumbing to make it the active view.26 Double-click 3D . Adding Vents to the System | 387 . use the Flip control to make the adjustment.

29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. then click Apply. specify 2" for D (diameter). 33 Click Modify. 31 Right-click the tee. 30 While pressing Ctrl. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. move the cursor into the drawing area. click Draw Pipe. and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. and on the Options Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast.

click Draw Pipe. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. (Slope). 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. right-click the connector at the open end. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 37 Drag the pipe preview. and click Finish. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . 35 Select the vent.

Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. enter Cold Water. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 4 In the Rename dialog. for New. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. click Properties. 2 Right-click Standard 1. click Rename. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. and click Duplicate. right-click Standard. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 41 You can save the open file if you wish.

The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Click OK. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. and in the right pane. for Name. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar.Plumbing to make it the active view. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. click Main. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. 12 In the table. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 11 In the left pane. 19 In the Filter dialog. and click OK twice. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". click Main. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 20 While pressing Shift. and double-click 2 . which places the piping above the ceiling. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. specify None For Cross. in the right pane. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. then click Duplicate. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. click Branch. click Branch. click the floor drain. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. enter Hot Water. 13 In the left panel. 9 In the table. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. click Mechanical Settings. and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Check None. in the right pane. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. specify Tee For Tee. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the left pane. and in the right pane. click View ➤ Piping. and in the Name dialog. then select Plumbing Fixtures.

33 In the Select Connector dialog. clear Casework. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. click Pipe. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 24 On the Option Bar. specify 2' 6" for Offset. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 29 Click Modify. click (Connect Into). 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. specify 0" /12" for Slope. click Show categories from all disciplines. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. click OK. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and click to end the run as shown. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. 26 On the Options Bar. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 32 Select the middle sink in the view. and click to specify the end the segment. select the domestic cold water connector. 35 On the Plumbing tab. and on the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. and click OK.

and click to end that segment. just above the wall. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. click Pipe. (If necessary.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and click Apply. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. 44 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. click the snap on the cold water pipe.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. press Tab. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. 38 On the Options Bar. specify 1' 2" for Offset. 43 Drag the preview to the left. select the cold water pipe. 39 Click Modify. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. specify 9' 3" for Offset.

48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). and click the + control to change it to a tee. click Pipe.Plumbing. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. right-click the open connector. double-click 3D. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. 50 On the Plumbing tab. click Draw Pipe. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. click to specify the endpoint as shown.45 Click Modify. 46 In the Project Browser. and when the center line for the left toilet displays. select the rightmost toilet. 51 Select the tee. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. . connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. 54 Select the leftmost toilet. and on the Options Bar click pipe. 56 Use the same method. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. .53 Click Modify. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. Create the Cold Water System | 395 . and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

the tee. 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and the horizontal segment to the sinks. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D .Plumbing view as shown.All of the cold water piping is in place. as shown.

Create the Cold Water System | 397 . 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). as shown. 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink).59 On the Options Bar. 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. 61 On the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter).

65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously.Plumbing. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and zoom in on the sinks. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater.rvt. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. create the hot water system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. 66 You can save the open file if you wish. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. specify 3/4" for D (diameter).64 On the Options Bar. double-click 2 .

click the water heater. click Check None. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click System toolbar. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. (Add to System). 6 On the Options Bar. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. 10 Double-click Water Heater. 14 In the System Browser. click the title bar for the browser. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 15 On the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . expand Domestic Cold Water. 5 In the Filter dialog. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. to the left of the main cold water pipe. expand Domestic Hot Water. The Edit System toolbar is activated. select Plumbing Fixtures. click Mechanical Equipment. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. and click Select. and click OK.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room.rfa. and click View ➤ Piping. and click Select. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. click (Edit System). 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. click Finish. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. click (Filter Selection). and click to place the water heater as shown. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar.

21 In the Select Connector dialog. click (Edit System). A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. and in the Type Selector. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater.18 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. select the domestic cold water connector. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. right-click the connector. click Draw Pipe. and click the main cold water pipe. click when the hot water connector displays. add the water heater to the cold water system. specify 8' 6" for Offset. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 19 Using the same method. click OK. and on the Options Bar. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click (Connect Into). 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 20 Select the water heater in the view. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. 23 On the Plumbing tab.

32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe.27 Click Modify. and click to specify the end of the segment. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 28 On the Plumbing tab. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. 33 Click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click Pipe. Create the Hot Water System | 401 . and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.

Plumbing. 36 Right-click the open connector. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . specify 2' 8" for Offset. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. (Connect Into). and click to end that segment. and In this case. click Draw Pipe. click Pipe. and on the Options Bar. 41 On the Plumbing tab. click Apply. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. 38 On the Options Bar. 40 In the Project Browser. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. double-click 3D.34 Select the middle sink in the view. 39 Click Modify. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater.

Plumbing. 43 Click Modify. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. 44 In the Project Browser. and click. double-click 2 .42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. Create the Hot Water System | 403 . 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

404 .

autodesk. create schedules. If the tutorial datasets are not present. After finishing each exercise. you create views and pipe types.rvt. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. By following the recommended workflow. As you create the systems. In this tutorial. insert fittings.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. manually modify the pipes and fittings. At the end of this tutorial. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and finally. However. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. However. During the fire protection design process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. click Reload From. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. if the link is lost. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. In this lesson. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and size and tag the pipes. Then. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. you will understand the process. and select i Office Building. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 405 .

13 Under System Type. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. click Rename. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. select Fire Protection Wet. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select Main. 9 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. select Carbon Steel. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 12 For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and click Fire Protection. and click OK. for Material. click Mechanical Settings. including the new material property. Next. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. 5 In the Rename dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. click the Training Files icon. under Mechanical. 2 Right-click Standard. You create new pipe types. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. and click Duplicate. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Fire Protection Wet. right-click the Design Bar. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. you modify the pipe type properties. for New. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Duplicate. and click OK.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. and click Properties.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. 3 Right-click the copy. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. Next. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

For Offset. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. do the following: ■ Under Category. However. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. structural beams. 22 While pressing Ctrl. select Branch. duct. 16 Under System Type. 15 For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Area. and click Add. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select it. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. or architectural components. 17 Using the same method. under Available fields. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. verify that 9' 0" is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. for Offset verify 9' 0". 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Click OK. So. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 18 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.■ For Offset. select Spaces. and click Remove. To remove a field. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. for System Type Fire Protection Dry.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Type. click Field Format. For Discipline. 27 Click OK. For Formula. enter Area/130. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space.24 Select a field. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Ascending is selected. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. For And. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that (none) is selected. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Under Level. verify that Number is selected. verify that (none) is selected. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Common is selected. For Then by. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. select Level 2. Verify that equals is selected. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. Verify that Formula is selected. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Field formatting. select Number.

you created new views and modified view properties. In this exercise. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. select 2 decimal places. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. you place the wet system sprinklers. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. For Units. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . select Fixed. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. sorted according to space number. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Next.31 In the Format dialog. 32 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. For Rounding. As a result. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Click OK twice. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Finally. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays.

you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. click the Training Files icon. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and double-click 2 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. When this happens. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. As you place the sprinklers. 2 Enter ZR. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). After placing the initial sprinkler. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. click Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room.

9 On the Edit toolbar. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. The selected sprinkler displays in red. click to specify the copy start point. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and click to place the sprinkler. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. select the sprinkler that you placed. and after the intersection snap displays. and that Copy is selected. 10 On the Options Bar.6 With the view zoomed. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. Placing Sprinklers | 411 . click (Copy). First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination).

you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point. The copy selection border follows the cursor. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and listening dimensions display to aid in placement.

15 On the Edit toolbar. and select Multiple. click (Copy). Next.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. 16 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. and after the intersection snap displays. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). 17 In Office 201. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. verify Constrain is cleared. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. Copy is selected. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . click to specify the copy start point.

414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. and after the intersection snap displays.

Placing Sprinklers | 415 .19 Move the cursor directly down. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.

416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .The sprinklers are placed.

22 On the Edit toolbar. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Verify that Constrain is cleared. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. For Move To. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. select Last. 21 While pressing CTRL. 23 On the Options Bar. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. Next. Furthermore. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). Clear Group And Associate. Placing Sprinklers | 417 .20 On the Design Bar. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. click (Array). it is an ideal situation to use an array. click Modify. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers.

NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. creating an array is a 2-step process. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the array end point as shown. 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. You first specify an array start point. An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. and after the intersection snap displays. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). to specify array end point. click to specify the array start point. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. and after the intersection snap displays.

The Office 202 sprinklers are placed. Placing Sprinklers | 419 .

you place sprinklers in Office 203. clear Multiple. 27 While pressing Ctrl. click (Copy). click to specify the copy start point. 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and after the mid point snap displays. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border.Next. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall. 29 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Edit toolbar. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection.

click to specify the copy end point.31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. and after the mid point snap displays. Placing Sprinklers | 421 .

enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps.NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. 36 On the Options Bar. click (Copy). You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. Open 204.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. Next. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . verify that Multiple is cleared. 32 Click Modify. 35 On the Edit toolbar. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. you place sprinklers in the large common space. Open 204.

click (Array). 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 41 On the Edit toolbar. and after the intersection snap displays. 39 Click Modify. For Move To. Verify that Constrain is cleared. You could copy sprinklers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 42 On the Options Bar. Next. click to place the sprinkler. 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied. enter 6 for the number of arrays. For Number.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. but creating an array is quicker. select 2nd. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared.

Zoom out to display the array. The array is created.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. and after the intersection snap displays. Placing Sprinklers | 425 . click to specify the array end point as shown.

47 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. Next. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. verify that 2nd is selected. click (Array). click to specify end point for the second array. 45 While pressing CTRL. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. 46 On the Edit toolbar. If you make a mistake placing the array. For Number. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Constrain is cleared. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. undo the step and try again. you create multiple arrays based on this array. enter 4 for number of arrays.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. For Move To.

50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . click the check box associated with each warning. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. click Expand. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings.The arrays are created. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.

IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. click to place the sprinkler. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 56 Enter ZR.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. first.Fire Prot to make it the active view. select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. and click Modify.Next. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). click the Training Files icon. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. To modify a family type. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 58 In the Type Selector. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. you need to load them in the project. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Because this space does not have a ceiling. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and double-click 2 . 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Sprinkler. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. However. The sprinkler family loads into the project. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. for Offset. and move the dimension to the left. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. 64 On the Design Bar. under Instance Parameters. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Ceiling Fire Prot.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 10' 6".Ceiling Fire Prot view. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. and press Delete. 67 Select the dimension. NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. click the center of the sprinkler. 60 Right-click the sprinkler. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. then click the wall face of the lower wall. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and click Element Properties. Placing Sprinklers | 429 . and on the Options Bar. 62 Click OK. as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. click Dimension. double-click 2 . 61 In the Element Properties dialog. 63 In the Project Browser. Next you adjust the offset. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension.

Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. Round decimals up to the next whole number.68 Using the same method. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. then click Modify. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.

then select Sprinklers. click Check None.70 In the Project Browser. double-click 2 . 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model. (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. and on the toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 431 . click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. and click (Filter).Fire Prot.

1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and double-click 2 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise.Fire Prot to make it the active view. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. and physically with piping. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. However. Unlike logical connections (systems).

click Check None. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. and click OK. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. If the System Browser does not respond. and display pinned and in red. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. 7 In the Filter box. click System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. then press F9. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. click in the drawing area to make it active.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 6 On the Options Bar. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 8 On the Options Bar. select Sprinklers. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system.

434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . expand Piping. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. Next. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. right-click Fire Protection Wet. and click Select. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. press Tab. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. named Fire Protection Wet 1. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and a piping layout preview displays. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing.

these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Click (Previous Solution). verify that Main is selected. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . The layout path solution displays.NOTE The is selected. and for Offset. click Solutions. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and select solution 4. For Offset. enter -12' 0". When the layout is finished. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 18 Click OK. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. click Place Base. and click to place the base component as shown. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Branch. and on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. click Solutions. 23 On the Design Bar.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Modify. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. you modify the selected layout. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. A (parallel movement control) displays. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. In general.Next. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.

and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown.27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 . 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211.

feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. 31 Drag the it. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select the horizontal branch again. as shown. 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area.

Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. as shown. click (Thin Lines). Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. In general.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. 35 On the toolbar. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. So far. However. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 .

This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. or manually modify the pipe. click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.38 Select the horizontal branch again. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select a different layout solution. and drag the the branch piping. Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. as shown. right-click the connector at the open end. click in Office 211. click (Filter). click to specify the end point. 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . on the Options Bar. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. 42 In the Filter dialog. (Connect Into). 41 On the Options Bar. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. and click OK. click draw pipe. as shown. and the sprinkler in the open area. clear Sprinklers. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. 43 Press Delete. including the cross and transitions from the main piping.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211.

48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 51 Press Delete. and press Delete. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. 50 While pressing Ctrl. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216. as shown. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . including the pipe and the tee as shown.

■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. Drag the preview down. Click Modify. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. 55 On the Design Bar. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. click Pipe. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. click to specify the end point for the pipe. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215. and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and click the horizontal pipe as shown. (Trim/Extend).■ Select the sprinkler to the left.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you create the dry fire protection system.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. checked connectivity.Fire Prot view. Open the i Completing the Wet System. 2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. The entire system should be highlighted. and double-click the 2 . 58 Click Modify. In this exercise. and converted pipe fittings. and press Tab twice. In the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After creating the system. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. indicating connectivity throughout the system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system.

This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). air terminals. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). and so on) are logically connected by a system. mechanical equipment. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. 4 In the 2 .3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system.Fire Prot view. and AC units. System tools display on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the system. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . system equipment. boilers. such as VAV boxes. select a pipe segment. or sprinkler in the current wet system. you can select the pipe or duct. fitting. and pipe or duct is created. The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. radiators.

Select Multiple. 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active.6 On the Edit System toolbar. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . For Number of Elements. click 7 On the Options Bar. You cannot select them. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. For System Name. verify that 30 is specified. For System Equipment. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). verify that None is specified.

13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. On the Options Bar. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. click Finish to finish editing the system. On the Options Bar. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. click Paths). 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. select Network. solution 1 3. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections. and on the Options Bar. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. 14 On the Options Bar. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. verify that Solutions is selected.The selected sprinklers display in red. and click Modify. for Solution Type.

15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model. 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). 17 Select the vertical branch again. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown.The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 . and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown.

Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Using the same method. click Finish Layout. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . as shown. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. The piping for the upper half of the model displays.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208.

22 You can save the open file if you wish. For this exercise. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. and press Tab 3 times. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. As with the wet system. In the next exercise. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. you create the dry fire protection system. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. After creating the system. and checked connectivity. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 . it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. In this exercise. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. In an actual dry system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. The entire system should be highlighted. indicating connectivity throughout the system.

press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Be careful to select only the sprinkler. Open the i Creating the Dry System. and double-click 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. If necessary.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. 8 Click Modify. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. as shown. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. click to specify the copy start point. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. Verify that Copy is selected. click (Copy). and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. 5 On the Options Bar. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection.4 On the Edit toolbar.

454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. you change the sprinkler type.Dry .Fire Prot to make it the active view. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. 18 In the Type Selector. 13 In the System Browser. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Next. The System Browser opens. The system is created and listed in the System Browser.Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. and click Select The selected system displays in red. 19 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 11 On the Options Bar. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215.Pendent . For Offset. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. verify that 1/2" is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 10 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8" / 12". select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. select Sprinkler . click System Browser. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. double-click 2 . For Slope. Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category.

as shown. click to connect the pipe. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. and click. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler.

and clear the Lines category. All categories are selected except the Lines category. as shown. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. All categories are cleared. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. 24 In the Project Browser. Next. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Show categories from all disciplines. and double-click 3D. click None. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. select any category. click All. under Instance Parameters. on the Model Categories tab. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. and clear a check mark from any category. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. click All. and click View Properties. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. click Edit.

click . and all pipe fittings are automatically added. To follow good design practice. The slope value displays next to the slope control. 32 Zoom the view. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 .30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope.

click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Then. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. and double-click 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. you placed dry system sprinklers. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. You have completed the dry fire protection system. indicating that they are connected. and press TAB 3 times. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. 2 If necessary. and double-click 3D to make the view active. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. the active view is tiled to the left. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click the Training Files icon. checked pipe connectivity. Additionally. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Fire Prot to make the view active. TIP When you tile 2 views. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 36 Proceed to the next exercise. First. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. 3 In the Project Browser.

You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. width. In the 2. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 7 On the Options Bar. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. height. and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. or width. and click OK. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. or height. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . Changing the diameter. click Check None. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers.Fire Prot view. width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 8 In the Filter dialog. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. click . NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter.

12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. select the supply pipe in the stairwell. zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. select 1". 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and while pressing SHIFT. for D: (diameter). 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. verifying that it is connected. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. and press TAB twice.

draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. If branch segments are selected. NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . and on the toolbar. select the model. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving.

while pressing CTRL. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. the pipe fittings.14 With the main selected. and the supply pipe. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. 15 On the Options Bar. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. for D: 6". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. select Shading with Edges. and on the View Control Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. use the pipes and pipe fittings.The main piping is selected and displays in red. NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. 17 In the 3D view. 2 3 4. for Detail Level. especially around the pipe fittings. and for Model Graphics Style. Sprinklers Serviced 1. for D. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select Fine. select 4".

26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right.21 Click in the 2 . for D:. The pipe diameter is modified. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. 23 On the View Control Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements.Fire Prot view to make it active. select Shading with Edges. for Detail. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. select 2". 22 Enter ZR. select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building.

and on the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. for D: select 1 1/2". select 1 1/2". 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch.This segment services 4 sprinklers. for D:. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view. Next. you continue to modify the pipe branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 .

35 Click OK. 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. NOTE Tags are view specific. Clear Leader. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 34 In the Tag dialog. you place a tag and include a leader line. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. click Tag ➤ By Category. and after the segment highlights. click to place the tag.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. Click Tags. Next. and on the Options Bar. under Category. for D: select 1 1/4". verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 33 On the Options Bar. select Leader. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 37 On the Options Bar. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. for Pipes.

Next. 2 3 4. Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 .39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). and finish placing the pipe tags. and finish tagging the pipes. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag.

In this tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags the pipes. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. You can save the open file if you wish. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system.

Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . as after this selection is made. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. Before using this tutorial. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. In the third lesson. you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. After learning to modify an existing family. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. including power. telephone. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. In this tutorial. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. not only for the geometry.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. alarm systems and others. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Pipe connectors are used for piping. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Steam. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. duct fittings. pipe fittings. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact.

If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. select Electrical. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. instead of creating a new one. and then load it into the project. Finally. open it in the Family Editor. At times.Downblast . Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . it is easier to modify a component. navigate to a folder of your choice.rfa. For example. You can create a component from scratch. 4 In the Project Units dialog.rfa. The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. Modifying Families In this lesson. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. Place connectors. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. for Rounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. 7 Save the family. and for Current. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. You can modify an existing component. electrical. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. for Discipline. Define shared parameters. 5 In the Format dialog. select 1 decimal place. Create formulas for parameters.mechanical. modify it as needed. or plumbing component. click the Training Files icon. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click the Format column.Downblast. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. 2 In the Save As dialog. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space.

for Group parameter under. and click Select. enter Common For Type. under Parameters. 13 Browse to a folder. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . 19 Using the same method. enter Text 18 Click OK. click Add. click Add. To reuse this tutorial. select the Shared parameter option. under Parameters. Click Yes. 16 Under Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. select Motor FLA. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. select the Type option. enter MEP.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click New. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. select the Electrical Engineering. and click OK. and click OK. 23 In the Family Types dialog. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. and click OK. 15 For Name. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Save. click New. enter a File name (for example. enter Motor HP For Discipline. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. and click Create. click the Shared parameter option. under Groups.

33 Using the same method. 31 Click OK. enter 1/6 HP . 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created. and click OK. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK.208 V .460 V . create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP . 27 Using the same method. and click OK.3 Ph 3 HP . 35 Save the family. for Group parameter under. 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. under Parameters. select the Type option.5 4. for Parameter Group.1 Ph 2 HP . 3.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. click New.25 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Electrical Engineering. 30 For Name.8 7. select MEP.208 V . under Parameter Data. 26 In the Parameter Properties.1 Ph. select Voltage.115 V . add the following shared parameters to the family type.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8.

Balanced. click Electrical Connector. alarm systems and others. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. NOTE If necessary. and verify that is selected. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. 37 On the Design Bar. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. number of poles and the same voltage specified. select Power . including power. system type.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. See Connector Placement on page 567. See Connectors on page 561. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . telephone. 38 On the Options Bar. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. while pressing Shift. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button.

Downblast. 42 In the Family Types dialog.rvt displays in the drawing area. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt file. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project.Mech. click Load into Projects. select Voltage. and click OK. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 61 Select the fan. 44 On the Options Bar. 55 On the Design Bar. click . for Voltage. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator . and on the Options Bar. 50 Save the family. 47 Using the same method. click the Training Files icon. for Load Classification. select HVAC. (The exact location is not important. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. and click OK. in the = column. click list.rfa to make the family the active view. click Mechanical Equipment. and double-click 2 . and in the Type Selector.) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size.460 V .rvt. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. 49 Click OK. . for Name. click Family Types. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. 56 The i Sample Project. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. select 3 HP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and again observe the Type Parameter values. 63 Click OK.3 Ph. 64 Save the family.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 57 In the Project Browser. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .) 60 Click Modify.

Power. select Power. select Electrical. for Parameter group. 2 Select the VAV box. select the Shared parameter option. It this is not the case. For Type. and double-click 1 . 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. select MEP. click New.rvt. 6 In the Family Types dialog. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. click Add. for Parameter group. click the Training Files icon. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. 11 Under Parameters. For Discipline. and click Select. under Parameters. click Edit Family. 5 Click Family Types. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. 9 Click Edit.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select MEP. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 .

and click OK. 23 In the Formula column. for Group parameter under. click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter 3. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. select the Instance option. 21 Using the same method. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Electrical Engineering. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameter Data. 17 In the Family Types dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 1. under Parameters. and click OK. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 2. select the Shared parameter option.13 Using the same method. select Electrical Engineering. For Phase. and click OK. for Group parameter under. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. verify that Size 2 .6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. and click Select. add the following shared parameters to the family type. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. select the Instance option. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter 480. under Parameter Data.

For Motor FLA. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. For Motor On Phase.2. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. 0 VA). enter 1/4. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. Motor FLA * 277 V.9 3.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. enter 1. Motor FLA * 277 V.3. 25 Under Family Types. click new. For Motor HP. create additional types. in the Value column. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. 24 Under Electrical Engineering. For Apparent Power Phase 3.rfa.8 inch Inlet. 0 VA). 0 VA). enter 1. enter 1/6. 26 In the Name dialog.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. For Motor On Phase. 28 Using the same method. and click OK. enter 3. enter 1. enter 2. For Motor HP. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. For Motor FLA.2 5. enter 3. 27 In the Family Types dialog. For Apparent Power Phase 2. enter Size 3 . Motor FLA * 277 V.

For Apparent Load Phase 2. and click to add the connector on the face. column. and click OK. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. and verify that is selected. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Number of Poles. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and on the Options Bar. select Apparent Power Phase 1.32 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Power . click . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Electrical Connector. click in the column. and click OK. click in the Voltage. 35 Click Modify.Unbalanced. click in the column. click in the column. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Apparent Power Phase 2. select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. 36 Select the connector. 33 On the Options Bar. For Voltage. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.

enter HVAC. enter 3000. click (Edit Circuit on Panel). for Panel. 43 Select the VAV box. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2. select panel HA. For Load Classification. The loads on phases A. For Electric Heat Power. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the column. respectively.Power. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. 1000. and click Yes. for Type. 42 In the Project Browser. enter 1. 52 Select the VAV box. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . For System Type. 50 Select panel HA. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . verify that Power . and 1000. 45 Click Modify. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). click Load into Projects. 49 Click OK. and click . and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. B. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. and double-click 1 . 39 Save the family. 46 Select the VAV box. 41 If prompted. and on the Options Bar. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. . The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 51 Click OK.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. and on the Options Bar. and C are 2512. select Apparent Power Phase 3. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. and click . and click OK.Unbalanced is selected. and on the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select Override parameter values of existing types.

rfa. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. 60 Select the supply air connector. respectively.Mech. click the VAV box. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. and 3667. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. 62 Click OK. 55 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The loads on phases A. select Override parameter values of existing types. as shown. and C have updated to 4819. 4027. and click Yes. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. and in the drawing area. 54 Click OK. 67 On the Options Bar. 63 On the Design Bar. click .■ For Electric Heat Power. 64 If prompted. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. click Load into Projects. B. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. (Create (Select Equipment for System). and double-click 1 . 57 Click OK. click . Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. enter 11000. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Mechanical. 56 Select panel HA. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector.

verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Design Bar. and click Settings. For Offset enter 9' 0".Round is selected. click Finish Layout. to select layout 6 of 6.68 Click (Layout Paths). and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. For Flex Duct Type. 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. Ductwork is created for the selected solution. 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. enter 6' 0". verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type. For Offset enter 9' 0". verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected.

73 In the System Browser. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM.4 X 20 gpm). 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. and select Properties. and select Properties. For example. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1.6 X 20 gpm). but one with 0. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. 80 Click OK. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. enter 300. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0.6 inch Inlet VAV. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. 76 Click OK. 78 Again.6 specified for Flow. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. 79 In the Element Properties dialog.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. and then you use the new families in a project. Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. under Electrical . click . Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 .Surface. enter 240.Surface.rfa. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the drawing area. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems. 5 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. insert. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard .240V MCB . The final section demonstrates how to load. 3 On the Options Bar.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector. all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families.Loads. select the connector. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. For Voltage. In the first section. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. enter 2. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 7 In the Save As dialog. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project.208V MCB . you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. click the Training Files icon. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser.rfa.

20 In the Name dialog. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. 23 Click OK. for Name.5 kVA. In the following sections. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 16 In the Family Types dialog. click Electrical Equipment. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. Next. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 14 Under Family Types. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. verify that 15 kVA is selected. select 112. you use the modified families in a project. you modify an existing family type. and click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa. click Delete. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers .rvt. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. Otherwise. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. delete all of the remaining types. click the Training Files icon. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width. enter 2.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. right-click the Design Bar. Next. 18 Click Apply. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Under Electrical. 13 For Name. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . 22 Under Dimensions. and click Electrical.00 V. click New. for Name. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Using the same method.480-208-120V . the inch value will be applied to the foot value. 25 In the Save As dialog. enter 3 kVA.NEMA Type 2. Primary Number of Poles is 2. 19 Under Family Types. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. for Primary Number of Poles.rfa. 21 Under Electrical.480V Primary. Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. except for 15 kVA. click Family Types. you create a new family type.

240V MCB . 32 In the Open dialog.Surface.rfa.480V Primary. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. and click Open. click Electrical Equipment. 36 Move the cursor over the wall. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. then while pressing CTRL.Power to make it the active view.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall. You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The new families are loaded into the project. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult. click to place the panel on the wall as shown.Surface : 100A. 37 Using the same method.31 On the Options Bar. click Load.240V MCB . 35 In the Type Selector. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 . 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families.

select the Single Phase Transformer. enter T-LC. 48 In the drawing area. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. under Electrical . click Electrical Settings. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. A new row is added in the right pane. 45 Click Add. select 480 Wye. Next. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. For Wires.Loads. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings.Loads. For Phase. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Panel Name. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. select 120/240 Single. For L-L Voltage. for Distribution Sys. click . 47 Click OK. 46 In the right pane. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. enter DP. 38 Click Modify. select 480/277 Wye. enter 480 Wye.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . Click OK. select 3. For Distribution System Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Electrical . L-G Voltage. 41 With the panel selected. 49 On the Options Bar. for Panel Name. and click OK. select 480. select Distribution Systems. select 277. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Single is selected. 40 On the Options Bar.

click a new circuit. for Panel Name. select DP.51 In the drawing area. 59 On the Options Bar. select T-LC. and click OK. This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . enter LC. . do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit).240V MCB . The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. Click . ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog.Surface : 100A (LC) panel. and on the Options Bar. For Panel. select 120/240 Single. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. 56 On the Options Bar. 53 On the Options Bar.Loads. click 60 On the Options Bar. under Electrical . on the Options Bar. 52 With the transformer selected. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. select the transformer.Surface : 100A panel.240V MCB . Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. for Panel. click to create a new circuit.

1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. However. (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line.rfa. click 2 On the View Control Bar. you will be working at the back of the toilet. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. 5 On the Options Bar. so you must hide the wall in the view.Toilet .Wall Mount Flush Valve. click the Training Files icon. and verify that is selected. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Sanitary. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element. and on the View Control Bar. for System Type. Select the wall. click Pipe Connector. 4 On the Design Bar. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial .

6 Zoom in. 7 Click Modify. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. 10 Click . 8 Select the connector. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. highlight the round face. click pointing away from the bowl. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . not the flow direction. and click to add the connector.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. enter 0' 1 1/2". in the location shown. 14 Select the connector. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click 15 On the Options Bar. For Flow Configuration. select Out. enter 4. . For Flow Direction. 12 Click OK. 13 Using the same method. select Fixture Units. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. select In.11 In the Element Properties dialog. For Flow Direction. enter 0 3/4". and click Modify.

Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . select Fixture Units.5.■ ■ For Flow Configuration. and double-click 1 . click the Training Files icon.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. enter 2.rfa. and in the Save As dialog. 18 Click File ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select a diffuser tag. 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Click OK.rvt. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans.Ceiling Mech. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Fixture Units. 2 In the drawing area.

4 Select the top label (1i). under Label Parameters. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. The Family Editor opens. select Type Mark. click Edit Label. Each label is associated with a parameter. and click 7 Click OK. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. click Edit Family. 6 Under Category Parameters. and on the Options Bar.3 On the Options Bar. and click from label). select Mark. The sample text changes to 1t.

R-1. click Load into Projects. click Yes. If more than one project is open. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.8 On the Design Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. without saving. select i Sample Project. click the Training Files icon. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag.rvt. and click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the return air diffuser type. in the Load into Projects dialog. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. S-1.rvt. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type.

8 Move the cursor straight down. 4 In the drawing area. 5 On the Edit toolbar. enter 0 1/8". 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. select a light fixture tag. click Multiple. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select the 1i label. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. click (Copy).Lighting. and press Enter to specify the copy end point. 6 On the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. 2 In the drawing area. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. and after listening dimensions display. and double-click 1 .1 In the Project Browser.

Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 . 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label.The label is copied.

and click (Add parameter to label). You need to modify this box. 13 In the Edit Label dialog. under Label Parameters. and click parameter from label). you modify 2 labels. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. 12 Select the middle label. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. click Edit Label. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. 14 Under Category Parameters. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. for the Panel parameter. select Type Mark. enter PNL in the Sample Value column.10 Click Modify. select Panel. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and on the Options Bar. Next. 16 Click OK.

select Type Mark. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label). Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. select i Sample Project.17 Using the same method. click Load into Projects. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . select Circuit Number. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. and click Yes. 19 If prompted.rvt. select Override parameter values of existing types. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. If more than one project is open. and click OK. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters.

6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. without saving. In some cases. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. For example. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. or profile). 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. 9 Save the newly-defined family. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. If you expect to render your lighting designs. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. titleblock. model. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture.

ies file. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer. Tilt Plane.rft) lighting templates. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). and wall hosted objects. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. When you use a spot light template.rft. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. Spot Tilt Angle. (This is the location from which the . and move with.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). Light Source Axis (L/R).ies files from the Web for their fixtures. Additionally.ies file. you can also specify a . 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft. 5 Under Family Category. The . such as Generic Model face based. Spot Spread Angle. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. you may use a non-lighting family template. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B).ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. When working in a linked file environment. objects in the linked file. or a generic fixture. 8 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New dialog. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. When creating a lighting family.ies file is not used for rendering. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. a spot fixture. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. ceiling hosted. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 7 Click OK. 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download . and Light Source Elevation.rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder.planes that define the location of the light source. and Light Source Elevation. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture. select Lighting Fixtures. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut.rft). and double-click Front. and copy the Ltl9815. and click Open. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 .

13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. 11 In the Save As dialog. . and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. for File name. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 14 On the Options Bar.rfa. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. click Lines. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. 4" above the Light Source reference plane. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane. and click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' . Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. click .0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and Chain. and for Offset. specify 0' 0". then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar.

press Tab to highlight the short line. move the cursor over the line. then click just above the line. click . offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . 16 Click Lines. 17 On the Options Bar.Next you will duplicate the original outline. 19 Using the same method. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. enter 1/16". and for Offset. click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown.

22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. click and . click Lines. 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and for Offset.20 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 0". clear Chain. 21 On the Options Bar.

click Axis. 24 On the toolbar.23 Click Modify. and clean up the inside corner as shown. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. 25 On the Design Bar. click (Trim). The length of the line and its exact location are not important. 26 Click Finish Sketch. and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 .

specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . and on the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. for Emit from Shape. for Light distribution. 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog.27 Save the family. click (Point). select true (green check. click Light Source Definition. select the (yellow) Light Source. Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area. click (Photometric Web). not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

and click OK. and in the Initial Color dialog. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. For Initial Color. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. click Luminous Flux. click Electrical Connector. enter 3000 K and click OK. select <Custom>. click the Value column. and click OK. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. for Color Temperature. for Color Preset. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. enter 44. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture.85 for Value. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. click the Value column.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. click the Value column. and on the Options Bar. click the Value column. enter 0. or a static value may be entered. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter 3200.Balanced. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. For Initial Intensity. click Simple for Method. select Power . and double-click View 1.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. 35 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. click file browser . and select Ltl9815. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 .

enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. 37 Click Modify. and click OK. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. enter 277 For Load Classification. click ring as shown. and double-click View 1. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. verify that Power . and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). 38 In the Element Properties dialog. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click ■ ■ ■ . click Opening.) In the Project Browser. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. enter 0. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. click in the column. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. click and select Hide Element. 45 On the Options Bar. .36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views.95 For System Type. For Voltage. and on the View Control Bar. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. select Apparent Load from the list. select the connector.

click 47 On the View Control Bar. Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 .On the View Control Bar. click Load into Projects. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise.rfa to make the family the active view. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open.csv file. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. The lighting level increases to 33 fc. 52 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. 54 On the Design Bar.Ceiling Elec.rvt. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. and in the Type Selector. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . and the wattage increases to 168. In this exercise. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT.46 Click Finish Sketch. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). click the Training Files icon. 48 Save the family. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. click Hide/Isolate.

select Generic Model.ini file. 8 Using Windows Explorer. 10 Under Parameters. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and in the Save As dialog. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option.rft. select Piping For Type. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. select the Transition option. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). enter NR For Discipline. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. 7 Click File ➤ Save. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Part Type. 2 In the New dialog. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. Select the Always Vertical option. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569. select Pipe Fittings. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. When installed in the default path. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under.rfa. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. click Add. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder.csv file. Clear the Shared option.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor.csv) file. 4 Under Family Category.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange. 6 Click OK.

and for Offset. enter NR * 2 For R1. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. LenA1. "D1". "LenA2". enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. Level. R1. select Dimensions. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Ref. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 13 Using the same method. "LenA1". create Instance parameters named D1. select the Family parameter option For Discipline.csv Click Apply. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. ND) For LenA1. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. and select 3” = 1'. ND. click .12 Click OK. D2. enter D1 / 2 For R2. ND) For D2. For Type. 17 Save the family. LenA3. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 0’. LenA2. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 20 On the Design Bar. Flange Family | 509 . enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. 0’. ND) 16 Click OK. "D2". 0’.0". click Ref Plane. For Group parameter under. select Piping. 0’. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. enter 0' 2". ND) For LenA2. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. select Pipe Size.

29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 27 Using the same method.24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. and on the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. click . enter Pipe. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. 31 Click Modify. under Identity Data. click (Aligned). click Dimension.

34 Using the same method. click LenA1 from the list. 43 On the Design Bar. 38 Click OK. click Object Styles. Flange Family | 511 . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 41 On the Model Categories tab. and on the Options Bar. 46 Click Modify. click Visibility. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. click the Value column. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. and select Not a Reference. click Model Lines. under Other. clear Fine. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. and select 33 In the Element Properties. click the Value column for Label. 39 Save the family. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. and click OK. 36 Click . clear Chain. The length is not important. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and on the Options Bar. 47 Select the 3 model lines. and label it LenA2. under Other. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 42 Click OK twice. . click . for Is Reference.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane.

click . and select Not a Reference. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. create dimensions for the right vertical line. and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. Thus. click . from endpoint to endpoint. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. click Dimension. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. under Other. and click to place the dimension. create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. click . for Reference. 52 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. 58 Using the same method. 51 Click OK. we shut off the linework in Fine view. 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . move the cursor to the left.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. 57 On the Design Bar. 55 Click . and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 56 Using the same method. then select the other endpoint.

and in the drawing area. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. click the Value column. and select R2. Flange Family | 513 . 68 On the Options Bar. click and . click 72 Select the dimension line. click Set Work Plane. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 64 On the Design Bar. click . and double-click Left. 62 Using the same method. and enter 0' 5". and click .59 Click Modify. for Label. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. for Label. 71 Select the circle. click the Value column. and on the Options Bar. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. 67 Click Lines. and select D2. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. 70 Click Modify. under Other. click Radius. . under Other.

and in the drawing area. click and . clear Coarse and Medium. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. . Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. click column. click Radius. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click OK twice. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and enter 0' 10". click Edit. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. . and click OK. under Other. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. click the Value column. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 87 Click Modify. for Extrusion End. under Constraints. and click 91 Click OK. 84 Click Lines. click 89 Select the dimension line. 85 On the Options Bar. 88 Select the circle. select LenA2. and select R1. 76 In the Element Properties dialog.74 Click OK. 75 Click Extrusion Properties. 80 Click Finish Sketch. for Visibility/Graphics. 90 In the Element Properties. 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . for Label. 78 Under Graphics.

96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and double-click View 1. 103 On the Design Bar. 98 Save the family. 101 On the View Control Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. select Fitting. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. 104 On the Options Bar. Flange Family | 515 . 97 Click Finish Sketch. for Visibility. (Model Graphics Style).92 Click Extrusion Properties.0". select LenA1. click Pipe Connector. and click OK twice. and select 6” = 1'. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. where the 2 extrusions meet. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. click column. and click OK. 95 Under Graphics. for Extrusion End. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 93 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that is selected. under Constraints. and for System Type. click Edit. expand 3D Views. click extrusions. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown.

110 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. if necessary. 108 Select the connector. 107 Click Modify. click and. enter 5". click . 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .106 Click to add the connector. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. 109 With the connector selected. to change the direction of flow. for Radius. and click OK.

111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. add a connector to the larger extrusion. and using the same method. Flange Family | 517 . 112 Click Pipe Connector.

After completing the pipe fitting family. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 116 Click Modify. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. 117 Select both connectors. and on the Options Bar. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. click and. to change the direction of flow.113 Click Modify. First. and set the object visibility. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. under Dimensions. and click the second connector. test the fitting geometry. 114 Select the connector. in the column. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. and click OK twice. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . and by defining fitting size parameters. for Radius. 115 Select the first connector. select NR. if necessary.

Verify that Always vertical is selected. if you have other projects open during a session. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 6 Click OK. Even if you have created parametric families before. and double-click Ref. Level floor plan window. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. 9 In the Project Browser. For Part Type. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . Verify that Shared is cleared. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. 2 In the New dialog. 10 Maximize the Ref. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. However. Click Open. You can also press CTRL+S. If necessary. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. navigate to a folder of your choice. Select Generic Model. click . and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. Level to make it the active view. under Family Category. select Elbow. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters.rft. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. A new family file is created and new views open. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. and select 6" = 1'-0". 7 Click File ➤ Save. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 13 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Save As dialog. on the Edit toolbar. one window for each open project remains open. click the current scale value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared.

enter 0' 1". 20 In the Element Properties dialog. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Fitting.Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. click . enter Coupling. 16 On the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. for Name. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Ref Plane. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 18 Click Modify. and for Offset. TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. under Identity Data. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. for Name. and in the Element Properties dialog. click . 19 Select the left plane. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.

For Offset. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . (Line) is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 28 On the Design Bar. click Reference Lines. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected.24 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. 29 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Verify that Radius is cleared. for Name. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. enter Radius. 25 Right-click the new reference plane. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family.

draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. click (Align). draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. you draw an arced reference line. 36 Using the same method. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 31 On the Edit toolbar. Next. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting). align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 34 Using the same method. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .30 In the drawing area.

Verify that Radius is cleared. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . 41 In the drawing area. select this sketching option from the list. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). 42 Move the cursor directly down. 40 On the Options Bar. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. 44 Click Modify. 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. and after the endpoint snap displays. click Reference Lines. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. (Arc from center and endpoints). and. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. verify that 0' 0" is specified.39 On the Design Bar. enter 45. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. 45 Select the arc reference line.

50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. For Offset. 48 On the Design Bar.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. (Line) is selected. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. you draw a diagonal reference line. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. Verify that Radius is cleared. click Reference Lines. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. By default. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. Next. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc). 49 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected.

61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. 57 In the Type Selector. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. 58 On the Options Bar. 52 Click Modify. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. 60 With the Dimension tool active. 54 Using the same method. click Dimension. click (Angular). and clean up the witness lines as necessary. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). 53 Select the diagonal reference line. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. 56 On the Design Bar. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. on the Options Bar.While drawing the diagonal reference line.

create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The new family parameter. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. click Add. 66 Under Parameter Data. verify that Family parameter is selected. click Family Types. For Group parameter under. under Parameters. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. under Parameter Type. 67 Click OK. LenA1. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. For Discipline. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. For Type of Parameter. 64 In the Family Types dialog. select Piping. select Pipe Size. 68 Using the same method. enter LenA1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

the calculated length defines the geometry. in the Value column. 70 Click OK. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. 73 Using the same method. select the LenA1 family parameter. 75 Using Windows Explorer. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). NomDia. in the Formula column. NOTE When specifying formulae. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . enter NomRad * 2. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. For NomRad. 69 In the Family Types dialog. For LenA2. enter 1. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter.25". enter 2". navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. 72 On the Options Bar. 71 In the drawing area. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. in the Formula column. for Label. 74 Press CTRL+S. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter.Next. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. in the Value column. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes.

528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Profile. This is the default path. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. Level floor plan is the active view. NomDia). for Lookup Table Name. If you encounter this type of issue.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. However. "BdyRad". click Family Types.csv lookup table file. "LenA1". This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. RELATED During fitting creation. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. For CplRad. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 0. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. NomDia). Next. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. Next. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. 82 In the New dialog.rft. NomDia). enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. For BdyRad. Save the text file with the file name including the . NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. 0. you begin creating the fitting geometry. 0. enter Threaded Generic Elbow. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. If the file is saved in a proprietary format. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 77 In the Family Types dialog. "CplRad". and click Open.csv and click Apply. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted.Generic Elbow. 83 In the Project Browser. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. in the Value column. verify that the Ref. 79 Click OK. 78 In the Formula column.

For Offset. and select 6" = 1'.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. zoom out. 97 On the View Control Bar. and on the Options Bar. 89 Select the circle. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. 86 On the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . verify that Profiles is selected. and click OK. 85 In the Type Selector. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. align and lock the circle vertically. verify that 0' 0" is specified. click (Align). Verify that Radius is cleared. ). do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. 94 Using the same method. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. enter 1". 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally. click the current scale. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. 91 On the Edit toolbar. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. under Graphics. 87 In the drawing area. 88 Click Modify. click . click Lines. 96 Click the dimension value. 95 Select the circle.0". select Center Mark Visible. ■ (Circle).

select Piping. select Rad. and click OK. 100 In the Family Types dialog. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. Next. select the dimension. 104 Using the same method. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. select Pipe Size. select Dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.99 On the Design Bar. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. Fitting. create a family type named Coupling. For Type of Parameter. For Discipline. click Family Types. click Add. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. click New. 106 In the drawing area. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The new family type is listed in the Name list. you create a new family type. under Parameters. under Family Types. 102 In the Family Types dialog. click OK. under Parameter Data. 107 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 105 In the Family Types dialog. enter Rad. 103 Name the new family type. for Label. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . click Apply. select BdyRad. 109 On the Design Bar. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. for Rad. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. for Rad. and click OK twice. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. under Dimensions.108 Click File ➤ Save.rfa. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. Next. click . 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. 118 In the drawing area. 114 For Type. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. and click OK. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter.Generic Elbow project becomes active. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). 110 In the Project Browser. select CplRad. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. and click Properties. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. select Fitting. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. you load the fitting profile into the project. click . under Existing family parameters of compatible type. Next. you create the fitting geometry. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. right click Coupling. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. 115 Under Dimensions. Notice that the Threaded . In contrast. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 121 On the View Control Bar. select the left horizontal reference line. 120 In the Filter dialog. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 122 On the Design Bar.119 On the Options Bar. 124 In the drawing area. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. 126 In the drawing area. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Verify that the X. click Finish Sweep. click Finish Path. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. Y. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. click Pick Path. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 127 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and Angle options are specified at 0.

134 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 133 In the drawing area. Y. click Finish Path. 131 In the drawing area. click the red dot on the arced reference line. Verify that the X. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. Next. and Angle options are specified at 0. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Path.The geometry for the left coupling is created. select the arced reference line. you create the geometry for the fitting body. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

138 With the 3D view active. you verify the fitting geometry. 136 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. Next.The geometry for the fitting body is created. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. and click OK. Next. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter VG. The elbow fitting geometry is created. 137 In the Project Browser. clear all annotation categories. add a solid sweep. 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. The fitting geometry displays. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling.

double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and verify the fitting geometry. In this section. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. click The 3 sweeps are selected. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 145 In the Filter dialog. 143 In the drawing area. Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. select Other. (Filter Selection). Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. First. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. click Check None. 146 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. In Revit MEP. 141 In the Project Browser. Level to make it the active view. 144 On the Options Bar. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. drag the cursor to spin the model.

verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. 149 On the Options Bar. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 150 In the drawing area. Select (Pick Lines). click Model Lines. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 147 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ For Plane. 148 In the Type Selector. select the left horizontal reference line.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. Verify that Lock is cleared.

A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. 156 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. for Label. 155 Zoom out. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 153 Click Modify. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . click to lock the model line to the reference line. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. select Ang. 157 Select the permanent dimension. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line.A model line is created over the reference line. Each time you press Tab. 151 With the model line selected. and lock the model line to the arced reference line.

verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. 166 In the drawing area. 159 Using the same method. Next. If you lock it. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. 164 On the Options Bar. press Tab to locate the model line. 165 In the Type Selector. you dimension the diagonal model line. 161 Select the diagonal model line. 160 Click Modify. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. and modify the witness lines as shown. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). click (Angular). If necessary. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and modify the witness lines as shown. 162 Using the same method. 168 Using the same method. click the diagonal model line. 167 Click Modify. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. click Dimension. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter.

171 Press CTRL+S. and click Apply. for Ang. enter 90. click Family Types. The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 .170 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. you flex the part to validate the design. Next. under Dimensions. 173 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar.

178 On the View Control Bar.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. you create tick marks. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). 177 In the Filter dialog. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. 175 In the drawing area. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. 176 On the Options Bar. Next. and click OK. 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. this is usually caused by a constraint issue. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view.

click Model Lines. 180 In the Type Selector. 183 At the right end of the fitting. 181 On the Options Bar. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. do the following: ■ For Plane. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. Line length is approximate. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. Verify that Radius is cleared. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. 182 At the left end of the fitting.Only model lines and reference planes display.

then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 184 On the Design Bar. Next. 185 In the Type Selector. The 2 tick marks are drawn. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. length is approximate. verify that (Aligned) is selected. 189 Using the same method. 188 Using the same method. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). 187 On the left end of the fitting. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark).Again. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. 186 On the Options Bar.

and modify the witness lines as shown.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 192 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. for Label. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension. 197 Select the angular dimension. 190 Click Modify. Next. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. and lock it to 90 degrees. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. 194 On the Options Bar. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 . click Dimension. You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. The dimension are as shown. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. 196 Click Modify. click (Angular).

544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 90. The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter. click Family Types. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". for Ang. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 202 In the Family Types dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ .Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Apply.199 On the View Control Bar. Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

click Visibility. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. Only model lines are selected. Next.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. clear Fine. click Check None. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. Next.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. 206 In the Filter dialog. you set object visibility. 207 With the model lines selected. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. on the Options Bar. and click OK. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. Next. 204 In the drawing area. 205 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . click (Filter Selection).

Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. click None. 219 On the View Control Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. click Visibility. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. on the Options Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 218 In the Filter dialog. 221 On the Design Bar. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. 222 On the Options Bar. and after the edge highlights. select Dimensions. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. 217 On the Options Bar. You begin by placing the primary connector. and click OK. click None. 214 Press CTRL+S. click Pipe Connector. click (Filter Selection). cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. The fitting displays. and verify that Face) is selected. Next. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click to place the primary connector. click (Filter Selection). 212 With the sweeps selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. 210 On the Options Bar. 211 In the Filter dialog. verify that Fine is selected. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. and click OK. 216 In the drawing area. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. select Fitting from the system type list. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. and click OK. select Other.209 In the drawing area.

You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. 224 Using the same method. place a connector on the left face of the fitting. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. NOTE When you place fitting connectors. Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors.The primary connector is placed. the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 .

select the 2 connectors. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. Although the connectors are round. and click OK. select Ang. 229 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. you rotate the connectors. do the following: For System Type. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. and click OK. Next.225 Click Modify. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. Next. ■ ■ For Radius. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. select ■ . verify that Fitting is selected. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. click Link Connector. ■ The connector radii change. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. The 2 connectors are linked. you specify connector properties. click . click . The 2 selected connectors display in red. you link both connectors. 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Next. select NomRad. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. and click the other connector. 228 In the drawing area. 227 On the Options Bar. For Angle.

232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. where the part geometry is clearly visible. click to specify the rotation start point. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. and click to specify the rotation end point. 233 Select the connector. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. and after the intersection snap displays. creating an unexpected result. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. Remember that for rectangular connectors. the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . Although this is not as important for round connectors. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. The height is not on these axes. click (Rotate).

Next. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. you verify the connector arrow direction. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. This also flips the connector arrow.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation. 236 Using the same method. 550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

The 1 . opens. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). 241 In the New Project dialog.rte template. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. This is the default view when a project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. click Load into Projects. and click OK. based on the systems default template.rte template file. Under Create New. then click Browse. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. verify that the 1 . and locate this template file. 243 On the Design Bar. verify that Project is selected. Otherwise. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. 239 Press CTRL+S. It does not indicate flow direction. Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. Click OK. If more than one project is open. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection.rfa .Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog. Next. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown.3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. In most instances. 244 In the Project Browser. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. a new project is created based on the current project template. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Mechanical Equipment.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. To determine the part type family. and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. the part type must be defined. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. and Initial Color Control. Undefined. You can also define photometric characteristics. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. create a nested family. Duct Fittings. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). Exit. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. Fan and System Interaction. Duct Accessories. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. Transition.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. Equipment. Hood. Valve Light Source | 571 . For example. rectangle. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). Obstruction. spot. such as Light Loss Factor. Elbow. Junction. and the light distribution (spherical. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. In a project. Initial Intensity. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. or photometric web). So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. hemispherical. circle). as is the case with receptacles and switches. Pipe Fittings. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. In general. there are times when this is not appropriate. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. However. Duct Mounted Equipment. each lighting fixture family has one light source. line. Entry. Pipe Accessories.

the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. Telephone. Normal: Devices such as receptacles. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. grills. and light fixtures. Transformer. Controls. Fire Alarm Devices. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. and Communication. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Lighting Fixtures. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Nurse Call Devices. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. Electrical Equipment. Switchboard. Data Devices. Electrical Fixtures. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. Security. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. As indicated in the image.Family Categories Communication Devices. As indicated in the image. Fire Alarm. Lighting Devices. Data Panel. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. Panelboard. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. Security Devices. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. cross. fire alarm components. Nurse Call.

■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. ■ Part Types | 573 . Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.

574 .

NOTE For training purposes. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. 575 . exterior fire stairs. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. and a roof garden. lofty ceilings. balconies. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009.

576 .

you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. 577 . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. section. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. including plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. elevation. you learn how to create views from a building model. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views. You learn how to create new views from existing views.

rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Level 2. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 .Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.

under Floor Plans. and click OK. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. enter Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

Next. and click 1''= 80'-0''.14 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. click the current scale. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.

All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1/8''=1'-0''. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 .South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation. for Scale.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

8 On the Design Bar. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

■ Move the cursor down. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter South East. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. double-click South East. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. click Section. for Scale. under Views (all). 14 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. select 1/8''=1'-0''. 11 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and double-click Level 1. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and click OK. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. 15 On the Options Bar.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place it. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

and double-click Section 1. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 23 On the View Control Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand Sections (Building Section). using the blue circular drag grip. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . Creating Callout Views In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar.

select Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Resulting callout view . 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Callout. for Scale. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt.

and select the callout boundary.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. click Modify. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Creating Callout Views | 591 . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and click OK.■ Select the middle grip. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog.

and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select Detail View: Detail. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 13 In the Type Selector. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. for Scale. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. click Callout. double-click Section 1. Creating Callout Views | 593 .

double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown. expand Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. 594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 . You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.

select Section Head . Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 10 On the floor plan. select the current project. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. for Section Head. . and click OK. click Duplicate. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Level 1.Filled. select Custom-Section Head. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Edit/New. select the section line. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. clear any others. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Training Files. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Section Tail – Filled.Custom.rfa. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. under Floor Plans.rvt. enter Section Head – Custom. and can be applied to the section line. and click OK twice. Section Tail . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog.

and select 3. select 3/4'' Circle. scroll to Section Line. and on the Options Bar. select 3. click the Annotation Objects tab. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Click OK twice. On the floor plan. 15 Under Category. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 3/4''. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 3/4'' Circle. and select 2. click Duplicate. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. On the floor plan. click Edit/New. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Circle. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. . select Custom-Callout Head. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. 19 Click OK.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK.rfa. For Line Weight. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. For Dimensions ➤ Width. notice the circular elevation markers that display. scroll to Section Marks. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 22 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. for Elevation Tag. 17 Under Category. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 .

and select 7. enter 1/4''. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. scroll down to Callout Boundary. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. . for Callout Tag. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select the current project. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 39 Click OK twice. Click OK. click Duplicate. clear all others. click Load into Project. For Corner Radius. 36 In the drawing. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and on the Options Bar. 40 Press ESC. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 34 In the Name dialog. and click OK. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 43 Under Category. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. select the callout. and click OK. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab.30 On the Design Bar. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

view regions. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . click Training Files. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and select 4. 47 Select Callout Leader Line.rvt. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. masking regions. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 49 Click OK. select Dash. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.45 For Line Pattern. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Under Category. expand Callout Boundary. and visual overrides. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a View Template In this exercise. To accomplish this. filters. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. You learn to create view templates.

click Zoom to Fit. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 4 On the View Control Bar. and double-click East.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. clear Entourage. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. under Elevations. under Visibility. The crop region displays as red. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Hide Crop Region). 5 On the View Toolbar.

grids. and click OK.10 Under Visibility. and click Create View Template From View. levels. 14 In the New View Template dialog. and section lines are now hidden in the view. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. Creating a View Template | 601 . under Elevations. click OK. 15 In the View Templates dialog. right-click East. 13 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 16 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 12 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. elevation markers. double-click North. Callouts.

21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. click Apply.rvt.rvt. edit the crop region as before. 19 Using the same method. and click Apply View Template. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click North. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. double-click Penthouse. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.

for View Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Penthouse. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). for Bottom.2 In the Project Browser. right-click. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4). double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . under Floor Plans. under Extents. click Edit.

Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Bottom. select Roof Plan. click Plan Region.6 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. for Level. select Level 4. under Extents. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Lines. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Properties. Under View Depth. for View Range. click Edit. select Level 4. right-click.

Click OK twice. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.11 On the Options Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Under View Depth. click Region Properties. under Extents. Move you cursor diagonally. in this case. click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). select Unlimited. In the left corner of the building. 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 17 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. for Level. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. for View Range. click Modify. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . select Unlimited.

13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. select Solid Fill. Enter Hr. under Views (all). 9 Click OK.rvt. 11 Select Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. under Filters. under Projection/Surface. enter Rated Walls. and click OK. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click (New). 16 Click OK. for Pattern. select Fire Rating. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. for Color. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. click <No Override>. click Edit/New. 12 On the Filter tab. 17 Using the same method. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After you apply the filter. 5 In the Filters dialog. select the red color. under Basic colors. for Rated Walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Categories. and apply a color. and click OK. select Walls. click the Filters tab. click Add. Select contains.rating of the walls. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 In the Filters dialog.

The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Masking Portions of a View | 607 . On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. and click OK. click OK. click Remove. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as shown. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Show Crop Region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.rvt. 5 On the View menu.

NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click (Rectangle). 8 Select the crop region. 11 In the Type Selector. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.7 On the View menu. select Invisible lines.

under Floor Plans. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.14 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Finish Sketch. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Level 1. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. right-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Rename. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Pattern Overrides. 11 Click OK twice. click black. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click Override. and click 1/4''=1'0''. under Visibility. for Pattern. for Color. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . and click OK.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click <No Override> to apply a color. click in the Patterns field. right-click. select Solid fill. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Under Cut. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click the current scale. and click OK. select Walls.

under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 18 Right-click.

23 In the Color dialog.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines. for Pattern. 25 Click OK twice. and click OK. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. click <No Override> to apply a color. click Override. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. for Color. 20 Right-click. 21 Under Projection/Surface. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . click a purple color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. select Dash 1/16''.

and click OK twice. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 On the Design Bar.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. click By Category Override. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 28 For Color. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. select a bright green color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 29 In the Color dialog. select the sofa. right-click. click Projection Lines. click Modify.

you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project.32 Select one of the lamps. right-click. 33 On the View Control Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.rvt. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and click View. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. right-click. click Sheet.

and select the title block. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Number. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Sheet Name. enter A101. 3 In the Project Browser. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Click OK. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter Site Plan. 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify. expand Sheets (all).

under Other.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Smith. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 2009. For Client Name. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 14 Click OK. For Project Name. for Project Address. enter For Approval. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Status. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter J. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter 15 May. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Number. enter 2009-1. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. click Edit.

18 In the Sheet Title dialog. select the new sheet name. and click Save.Stairs In the following exercise.Elevations A106 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . and click Rename.Sections A108 .rvt. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. for Name. right-click.Elevations A107 .Layout Plan A104 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Floor Plan. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 17 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you add views to these sheets. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Elevations A105 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .

2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Modify. under Sheets (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). 6 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. and click to place the view. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag it to the sheet. double-click A104 .Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Elevations. and click to place it. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. select Level 1. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Sheets (all).

drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. double-click A107 .7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. align it with the East elevation. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Adding Views to Sheets | 621 . 8 On the Design Bar.Sections. click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click Modify. and click to place it. and on the Options Bar. 18 Under Floor Plans.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click OK. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. .Stairs. move the cursor over it. 16 Select title bar. and press TAB until it highlights. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. zoom in to the grip. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. for View Scale. double-click A108 . 19 On the Design Bar.

and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. and then make changes and deactivate the view.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . In order to do this. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.

enter 54'. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Select the building section view. and click Activate View. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click.rvt. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and press ENTER. click Modify.Sections. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. double-click A107 .

7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. double-click North. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 . and click Deactivate View.6 Right-click.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The camera view displays. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 7 Place the camera as shown.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. right-click. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. select the new sheet name. You modify the view to hide the view title. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. double-click Level 1. click Camera.rvt. enter T. Click OK. and click Properties. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 420'. enter 60'. enter 5'. Under Camera. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. For Target Elevation. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Far Clip Offset. Click OK.8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active.

enter 25''. under Sheets (all). double-click T . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click Apply. and then click OK.13 In the Project Browser. for Height. click Size. 15 With the view selected.Title Sheet. Under Model Crop Size. on the Options Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. select Scale (locked proportions).

click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. enter Viewport/no title mark. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. for Show title. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and close the exercise file. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. select No. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. under Graphics. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 .17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

630 .

You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tagging Objects In this lesson. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. expand Floor Plans. You also learn to create different types of schedules. click Training Files. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 631 . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. such as doors and windows.Level 1. such as room and window schedules. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because of the open style floor plan.rvt.

2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. click Room Separation. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 .6 Using the same method. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify.

16 On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. verify that Tag on placement is selected. indicating that it can be edited. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. type 8'. and click to place the room and tag. 14 For Offset. 11 In the Tags dialog. type U18-1. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and select the room tag. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. click it.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .rfa. and press ENTER. click Modify. click Training Files. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and the rectangle contains the room tag.

Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. Dining.18 Click the room text label. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. place rooms and tags. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . click Room. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 22 Click the room text label. type Entry. and press ENTER. 23 Using the same method. and press ENTER. click Modify. Click to place the new room and tag. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported.

and click OK.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 27 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and moving clockwise. clear Room Separation. click Room Tag.Level 2. on the Model Categories tab. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans. but they need to be tagged. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 29 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. The rooms are already placed.

Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt.rvt. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to place door and window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.

type U18-2. click Modify. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. type U18-1. 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and on the Options Bar. click Properties). under Identify Data. for Mark.

and drag it down to center it in the doorway. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 .9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right.

and click OK. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. select Door Tags.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa.Level 2. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Floor Plans. 20 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. click Training Files. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. verify that All objects in current view is selected. click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 15 Under Category. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. select Window Tags. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

select Leader. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 4 Select a dining room chair. click Yes to load a tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click Level 2. 26 Under Floor Plans. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 Using the same method. 29 Save the file.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rfa.rvt. and modify the tag placement and display. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you learn how to tag furniture objects. expand Floor Plans. select the edge to which the leader connects. tag all untagged windows.Level 1. click Training Files. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 At the confirmation prompt. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

and drag it above the chair tag. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. clear Leader. 12 Click the elbow control. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). and on the Options Bar. 11 Select the tag for the table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally.

select Furniture Tag : Standard. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Level 2. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . click Modify. click Tag All Not Tagged. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and on the Design Bar.

23 Save the file. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 22 In the Type Selector.20 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. you learn to add schedules. and click Modify. click Check None. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. and click OK. select Furniture Tags. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 21 In the Filter dialog.

Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Next. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. in which windows are listed by window type. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. that is.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Finally.

select Comments and click Add. 9 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields.rvt. under Category. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. select Windows.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. type Building Window Schedule. 7 Using the same method. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. and click View. 6 Under Available fields. 4 For Name. click Training Files. click the Fields tab.

this can be a time-consuming process. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. in large building models with many views. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. click Close. NOTE By clicking Show. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. 13 In the Project Browser. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. and on the Options Bar. right-click the schedule.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. If no open view shows the selected element. expand Schedules/Quantities. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . However. you are prompted to open one that does. and click View Properties. click Show. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays.

23 Click OK twice. click Edit. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. and click View Properties. for Sorting/Grouping. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Other. The window schedule is displayed. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. and press ENTER. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. The window type schedule is displayed. for Sort by. sorted by type mark. clear Itemize every instance.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you cannot use them to tag objects. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. unlike shared parameters.rvt. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. jamb. under Floor Plans. and sill conditions for a window can be found. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click Building Window Schedule. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. In this case. double-click Level 2.rvt.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types.

5 Click OK. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. for Fields. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Using the same method. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. for Name. and click Properties. 12 Click OK twice. under Other. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. click Edit. Under Parameter Data. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. right-click Building Window Schedule. click OK. select Construction. click Add to create the new parameter. select the following fields. so that they are listed before Comments. Select Type. For Group parameter under. type Head Detail.3 In the Project Parameters dialog.

expand Floor Plans. type 1/A107. for Jamb Detail. type Window Details. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.Door Schedule. type 3/A107.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. click in the Head Detail header. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Head Detail. and Sill Detail. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. and without releasing the left mouse button. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. TIP To select all 3 headers. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . for Head Detail.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. 17 Save the file. type Unit 18 . under Type Mark A. select Doors. click Group. You then hide the column used for the filter. and for Sill Detail. Under Name. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. type 2/A107. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. For example.Level 1. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Jamb Detail.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. 9 Click the Formatting tab. verify that New Construction is selected. click the Fields tab. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. select Mark. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. but is not included as a column in the schedule. 4 Click OK. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. and double-click A102 . select the following fields. select Family and Type. expand Sheets (all). 10 Under Fields. Select contains in the second field. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .■ For Phase. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Type U18 in the third field. 6 Under Available fields. 11 Under Field formatting. select Hidden field. and click OK. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule.

click Modify. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.Door Schedule. click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. click Unit 18 .13 In the Project Browser. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the sheet.

7 Under Text. select Number. select Rooms. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Available fields.20 Save the file.rvt. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 5 Using the same method. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. and click View. and click Add. under Category. and click OK. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. select Bold. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Level 1. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. to the right of Header text. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 8 Click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. under Floor Plans. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial.

type Building Entry. for room 101. For 104. next to Rows. For 103. select Corridor. The room Number is U17-46. add 5 more rooms. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. type Corridor. select Storage. and press ENTER. type Storage. For 105. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 . 11 Using the same method. for Name. type Stair. and press ENTER.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. click New. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 106. For 102.

and click OK. and modify room names. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Lines field. 4 Click OK twice. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Room Separation. Under Custom colors. you add room separation lines. click the bright green swatch. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Override. select 9. place rooms from a program list.rvt. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. draw the horizontal line. under Floor Plans. click the Color field. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Weight. click the Lines field. First. In the Line Graphics dialog. under Visibility. For Room Separation. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. expand Lines.13 Save the file. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1. under Projection/Surface.

click Room.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

14 For Offset. select 101 Building Entry. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 11 On the Options Bar. for Room. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. for Room. 13 On the Options Bar. type 8'.

Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 While pressing CTRL. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. place the following rooms. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 .15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 16 Using the same method. and zoom in to the Corridor. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas.

for Rows. 27 Select Schedule keys. select Rooms. type Units. and Wall Finish. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .21 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. under Available fields. click New. under Constraints. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Base Finish. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Modify. 31 For Key Name. and for all 3 finishes. click Schedule/Quantities. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and click Add. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Floor Finish. 30 On the Options Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. type As Selected. 24 Open the Room Schedule. clear Room Bounding. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. (Element Properties).

under Identity Data. for Room Style. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . select Units. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Click OK twice.32 Using the same method. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. under Other. select Room Style. 33 In the Project Browser. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 44 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. for Room Style. select Units. click (Element Properties). 38 Under U17-8. under Floor Plans. right-click Room Schedule. and click OK. click Check None. and click Properties. and click Add. for Available fields. for Fields. 43 In the Filter dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 37 Open the Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. click Edit.

select Service. For rooms 102 and 105.46 Open the Room Schedule. 104. for Name. under Graphics. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. at the warning prompt. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. and click OK. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Color. select Public. click 5 For Title. type Room Type. 103. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and 106. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 48 Save the file. click OK. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Room Style. 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. right-click Level 1. (Duplicate). click OK. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). and click Properties. click the Color Scheme field. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.

16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit. click the value in the Color column. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). expand Lines. clear Visible. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . under Schemes. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. select Room Type. 19 On the Options Bar. 14 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select the color legend. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Color Scheme Legend. click Edit Color Scheme. and clear Room Separation. under Visibility. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK.

type 1''. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. (Element Properties). respectively. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . type 1/4''. 29 Click OK twice. and select Show Title. for Swatch Width. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Size. 28 Under Title Text. 24 Click OK. on the Options Bar. click Modify. under Graphics. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. under Custom color.22 In the Color dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select blue. 23 Using the same method.

under Graphics. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. right-click Building Section. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Visibility. double-click Building Section. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. select Rooms. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and select Properties. 35 Click OK twice. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Color Scheme Legend.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. for Color Scheme. under Sections. click Edit. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . select Room Type. under Sections. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.

666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 45 While pressing CTRL. under Identity Data. (Filter Selection). and click OK. select Public. for Room Style. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 41 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. 42 In the Filter dialog. under Identity Data. select Units. click . click Check None. 46 Click . and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

54 While pressing CTRL. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. excluding the stairwell spaces. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . double-click Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. and click . for Rows. under Identity Data. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 51 On the Options Bar.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. type Suites. select Service. and click OK. click New. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style.

but not beyond it. select Suites. select Areas and Volumes. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .55 Click . 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. The color fill will extend to the roof. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that At wall finish is selected. under Identity Data. The color fill extends to the roof. for Room Style. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. under Volume Computations.

click Modify. select Level 2. type 0’ 0” . for Upper Limit. 67 On the first level.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and the living room. 70 For Limit Offset. the dining room. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). select Loft. for Upper Limit. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. type -10”. under Constraints. 68 Click . . 72 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 71 Click OK. select the stairwell room. 66 Click OK. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 .

Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}.rvt. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.73 Save the file. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

Insulation on Plywood Deck . 9 Using the same method. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . under Category. and click Add. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. For Then by. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. and click OK. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. 4 In the Type Selector. select Material: Description. click Modify. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 3 While pressing CTRL. select Roofs. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .EPDM.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 5 On the Design Bar. select Family and Type. under Available fields. click Family and Type. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Calculate totals. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. for Fields. and under Fields. and click OK twice. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. Under Field formatting. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Edit. and click Properties. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. and click Add. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Area. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. select Material: Cost. click the Formatting tab. under Other. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. for Name. select Calculate totals. for Material: Cost. 23 For Field formatting.50 1. select Currency. under Available fields. 20 For Formula. 21 Click OK. 17 Click Calculated Value.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 For Type. click Estimated Cost. 12 Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. type Estimated Cost.25 4. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2).

and are defined and stored in an external file. you create a shared parameter file. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 30 Click OK twice. 27 In the Format dialog. which inserts commas after every three digits. 26 In the Project Units dialog. adding the shared parameters to a family. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . 31 Save the file. Digit grouping. ensuring consistency across families and projects. The cost fields are formatted correctly. for Rounding. and reporting the shared parameters. for Currency. These shared parameters can be added to any family. select $. You draw a travel path line. In this lesson. you create an exiting plan for the building. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . tag the line. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. 28 For Unit symbol. can be used for any number-based parameter. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. click the Format value. 29 Select Use digit grouping. and schedule the total distance of each path. not just for currency. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. regardless of category. either within family components or within the project template.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. for Type of Parameter. type Exiting. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for File name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. click Training Files. 9 Under Parameters. under Groups. click Training Files. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. click New. and click OK. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. and click OK. type Travel Distance. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click Create. for Name. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.txt. select Length. click New. type Path ID. 7 Under Parameters. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.

click Family Types.rvt. under Parameter Type. under Parameter Data.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. in the Load into Projects dialog. type Length. click Add. and select Instance. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Load into Projects. 11 Click OK. for Travel Distance Formula. Click Training Files. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 10 Using the same method. click Add. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . You then create a generic tag to tag the family. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. and click Select. 14 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 8 Select Instance. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. select Shared parameter. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. under Parameters. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. and click OK.rvt. and click OK. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Group parameter under. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. select Constraints. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Dimensions. following the equals symbol (=). 4 In the Family Types dialog. If you have multiple projects open. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 15 If necessary. 13 Click Apply. group it under Dimensions. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.rfa.

20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. under Category Parameters. click Label. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click (Add Parameter). and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag.rft. and click OK. click Select. select Travel Distance. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 On the Design Bar. click parameter(s) to label). select Travel Distance.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Label. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Training Files. 24 Click OK twice.

and move it down. 35 Save the file. and click Save. 29 In the drawing window. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 33 On the Design Bar.rvt is selected. and click OK. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. select Path ID. and press DELETE. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window.28 On the Design Bar. type Travel Distance Tag. 32 In the Save As dialog. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. for File Name. click Modify.rfa. click Load into Projects. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 .

and click in the center of the corridor. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Chain. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Tagging.Level 1. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 6 Move the cursor to the right. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Exiting Plan . 2 Zoom in to the corridor. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Placing.rvt. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 4 On the Options Bar. After the lines are tagged. above the exterior door as shown.

double click Exiting Plan . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 .Level 2.7 Move the cursor down. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. type 1-1. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. move the cursor near the right corner. through the door. and click outside of the building. click Modify. Placing. 17 On the Options Bar.Tagging. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Component. verify that Chain is selected. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the 2 dashed travel lines. for Path ID. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 10 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 8 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties).

and click above the door to the stair. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor down.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Component. move the cursor to the left. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click.

select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. type Level 1 Exit Distance. for Path ID. 28 While pressing CTRL. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . click Tag ➤ By Category. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 33 For Name.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Tagging. Placing. type 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. click Modify. 30 Using the same method. . click Modify. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. 27 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

under Other. 36 For Filter by. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the first field. and click Add.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Rename. click Edit. and in the third field. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Path ID. type 1-. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 38 For Sort by. 49 Click OK twice. and click OK. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Training Files. 43 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Properties. in the second field. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. 42 Click OK. 35 Click the Filter tab. while pressing CTRL. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. in the third field. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Filter. select Calculate totals. 41 Under Fields. under Available fields. and under Field formatting. 40 Click the Formatting tab. select contains. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 46 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Path ID. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. select Travel Distance. type 2-. for Filter by. 50 Save the file.

Fixed Partitions. click the Fields tab. right-click the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. for Assembly Code. right-click Generic . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.6''. and click OK.Partitions . and click . and click View.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 . under Identity Data. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. expand C .Interiors ➤ C10 . 10 In the schedule. and click Properties. 9 Click OK twice.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Categories. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and select C1010145 . click the Value field. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select the following fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. select Walls. 4 Under Available fields.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. and click Next. click Create.mdb. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 6 Click Finish. under Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 11 Click OK 3 times. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 3 Click New. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click OK to create the database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. for Database Name. select a location for the database file. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . type Revit_Project. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.11 Close the exercise file. click OK. the database display may be different than that shown. 1 On the File menu. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories.mdb). 8 In the New Database dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson.rvt. click the File Data Source tab. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.

The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Additionally. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 13 Close the exercise file. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. in addition to the Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. For example. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

686 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'.

If you did that now. 6 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. for Elevation Base. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. type 1/4'' Head . 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. However. In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. select Shared. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. click Training Files. and double-click South. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. click (Element Properties). to better demonstrate how shared levels work. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. expand Views (all). only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time.Shared Elevation. Relocating a Project | 689 . Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Under Constraints. The levels in the project are not shared.

10 On the View menu. The base elevation now reads 325'. By typing 325' in this step. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. you specify the new location of the project. click Modify. select Level : 1/4'' Head . The south elevation is displayed. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. 13 On the Design Bar.By selecting the Level 1 line. type 325'. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .Shared Elevation.

15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. and the Roof Plan level. under Elevations. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. select Levels 2-4. Relocating a Project | 691 . as well as other views of the building model. the Penthouse level. double-click North. 14 In the Project Browser.

In Revit MEP. select Level : 1/4'' Head . Dimensioning In this lesson. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.Shared Elevation. You place linear. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. In this case. click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. although you must turn on their visibility to view them.■ ■ In the Type Selector. permanent dimensions are created automatically. and angular dimensions. 16 If you want to save your changes. Dimensioning on page 692. and save the exercise file with a unique name. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . except when you sketch profiles to complete families. multi-segmented. radial. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. On the Design Bar. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. click File menu ➤ Save As.

By default.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. click Dimension. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. snap to wall centerlines. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Dimensions | 693 . The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. expand Views (all). 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. dimensions are aligned.

and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. 5 Move the cursor above the view. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. select it.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.

The lock displays as locked. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 695 . and select it. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step.

but below the first dimension that you placed. and select its left exterior face. above the plan view of the building. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. for Prefer. select the right endpoint of the planter.11 Using the same method. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select the right side of the curtain wall. select Wall Faces. 16 Move the cursor up. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. click Modify. and click OK. enter Linear . click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. select Baseline. 27 Click OK twice. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. .3/32" Arial . 26 In the Type Properties dialog.Baseline. under Graphics. for Dimension String Type. enter Linear . 25 In the Name dialog. select Ordinate. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 697 . 22 In the Name dialog.3/32" Arial . View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. click Edit/New.Ordinate. click Duplicate. 18 On the Basics tab. and on the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. and click OK. click Duplicate.

29 Select the dimension string.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. for Below.3/32" Arial . The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. 33 Under Text Fields.Baseline. select Linear . select Linear . 34 Click OK. and in the Type Selector. below. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. . 30 In the Type Selector. enter Planter. or to the right of a permanent dimension value. under Dimension Value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. to the left. for example Text dialog displays.

35 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 699 . 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. For Prefer. click Dimension. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Modify. select Wall faces. and specify a point to place the dimension. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Modify. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. and select it. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights.

43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. for Suffix. click Modify. 44 With the dimension still selected.42 Select the radial dimension. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. click the dimension text. 46 On the Basics tab. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. type Typ..

Creating Dimensions | 701 . 50 Select the horizontal line. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). For Prefer. verify that Wall faces is selected. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). 54 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . When you dimension the wall. expand Floor Plans.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. you select only the wall.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. and click to place the dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and double-click Level 3. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 53 On the Basics tab. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702.

and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Click Options. Click OK. and select Widths. select Entire Walls. click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . For Pick. select Openings. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the automatic dimension string. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view.

Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. click Modify.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. When you place dimensions. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.7 On the Basics tab. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. However. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. in some cases. you specify their origin on the Options Bar.

Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Individual References. click Dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. and select it. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. For Pick.

706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . move the cursor down. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the bottom right endpoint.7 Using the same method. 10 Using the same method. and click to place the dimension. select the right edge of the planter. and select it. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.

for Prefer. select it. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. click Dimension.11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. select Wall centerlines. 13 On the Options Bar.

and drag the dimension down the wall. click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 19 Release SHIFT. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and click to place the dimension. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 16 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT.

drag it to the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. you change the dimension tick mark. After you create the new family type. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. text font. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style.20 Click the blue middle grip. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. and using the same methods. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 .

710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select the lower dimension.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. for Tick Mark. select Arrow 30 Degree.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. type Office Standard. 2 Click (Element Properties). click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics.

for Text Size. select another font. click Modify. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. select CityBlueprint. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 .■ ■ Under Text. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 9 In the Type Selector. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. For Text Font. and select the bottom dimension. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. 7 On the Basics tab. ■ Click OK twice. 10 On the Basics tab. type 1/8”.

12 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Text Annotation on page 712. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and modify it to use the office standard parameters. create a new angular dimension type. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes.11 Using the same method. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. select the angular dimension on the planter. and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 3 On the Options Bar. for Leader. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. click (None). zoom to the planter near grid line 5.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. but below the upper dimension string. and click and drag to create a text box.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

for Text Size.5 In the text box. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 11 Under Text. under Graphics. select Arc Leaders. and click . Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. type EXISTING BUILDING. 10 In the Name dialog box. type 1/4''. If so. click Duplicate. 7 Select the text box. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box.

■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and type Planting Bed. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 .Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Leader Arrowhead. click Modify. Click Rename. click Modify. Click OK twice. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. type Standard Notes. 24 On the Design Bar. for Text Font. for New. In the Rename dialog. Under Graphics.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 20 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select CityBlueprint. and click OK. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Text. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.

for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector. click to place the text box. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. click Text. click (Arc). over the Planting Bed text. select Text: Standard Notes. and type 18'' Conc. 31 Click in the text box. Wall.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.

33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.32 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As.

and metal studs.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. you trace over the building model geometry. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. add detail components. like a standard door header condition. plywood. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. In order to detail from the building model. 719 . These components display at the required scale. In the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson.

The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects.rvt. 7 In the drawing area. which means that all detail components. After you add components. click Detail Component. and click Open. You load detail components. Exact location is not important.Detailing the View In this exercise. click Training Files. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. as well as detail lines. region objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. They are also view specific. The roof overhang detail displays. double-click the detail callout head. select As underlay. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and insulation objects. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the alert dialog.rfa. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. you detail the view of the roof edge. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. and click OK. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Duplicate. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 15 For Spacing. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. select Corrugated Metal. Detailing the View | 721 . 10 On the Options Bar.8 Delete the component. and click OK. 16 Click OK twice. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 17 In the drawing area. click Repeating Detail. enter 1' 4". 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click (Element Properties). click Edit/New.

Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Load. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. 24 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Open.rfa. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click Modify. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.19 On the Design Bar. click (Move). verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. click Detail Component. ■ ■ Click Modify.

and click Open. Detailing the View | 723 . press SPACEBAR 3 times. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. 31 To properly orient the component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. click OK. and place it in the detail view as shown. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Because you still have several components to load. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. click Training Files.rvt.

724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 38 Select the horizontal segment. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 35 On the Options Bar. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify. select Chain. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 37 Click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows.

Detailing the View | 725 . 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click Insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. For Offset. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. (Move). and on the Edit toolbar.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. enter 5 1/2". as shown. select to near side. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. 42 Click Modify.

select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. select Plywood-Section : 3/4".■ Click Modify. 47 In the Type Selector. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 51 Click Modify. and lock the component. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Detail Component. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 45 In the Type Selector. as shown.

For Offset. 4 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. meaning they display only in this view. click Detail Lines. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the Type Selector. they are view specific. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component.rvt. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines.52 Proceed to the next exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . and press ENTER. select Thin Lines. Like detail components. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines on page 727. enter 1/4". as shown. you add lines to your detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector.

For Offset. enter 1/4". 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. 11 In the Type Selector. and draw the detail lines as shown. and clear Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. as shown. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. click (Draw). as shown. select Chain. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 16 On the Options Bar. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

Adding Detail Lines | 729 . Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. draw the detail lines as shown. select Do not display. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Properties. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. select the Penthouse level line. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you turn the display model off. 24 On the View Control Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and click OK. 18 In the Type Selector. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Thin Lines. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 22 In the Project Browser.

press SPACEBAR as necessary. and press ENTER. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Component. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. enter 1/2". and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. click Detail Lines. select Break Line. select Vapor Barrier. 30 In the Type Selector.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. For Offset. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. you add text notes to complete the detail.32 Click Modify. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.rvt. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes on page 731. click Text. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Dimension. Enter the text. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Adding Text Notes | 731 .

you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. for Suffix.7 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Rename. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and click the dimension text. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Text Fields. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click.rvt. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and save the exercise file. click 6 In the Filter dialog. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click OK. Creating Detail Components on page 732. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. on the Options Bar. 8 Select the dimension line. and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog.. and press DELETE. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. enter Roof Overhang Detail . enter Typ. and click OK. select a text note. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. (Filter Selection).Keynotes. click Select All Instances. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Roof Overhang Detail.

select Medium Lines. click Training Files. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 16 Click Modify. and selecting the chain. while pressing CTRL. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 7 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 733 . 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and click Open. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select all the coping linework. 14 Click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. pressing TAB.rft. in the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

While pressing SHIFT. Adding Keynotes on page 735. and click Open. delete the underlying linework. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. 23 Using a window. click Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. enter Roof Edge. 21 To place the component. 28 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Training Files. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. select the coping. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Detail Component. The original linework remains selected. 31 Using the same method used previously. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 26 Press DELETE. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing .rfa. clear Detail Items. click Load. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 32 Proceed to the next exercise.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for File name. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 25 In the Filter dialog. 22 Click Modify. double-click it in the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. navigate to your preferred location.Keynotes view is not the open view. click . 30 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects.

and click OK. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. For the metal coping.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 2 In the alert dialog.B5. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 3/4" Plywood. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. use keynote 06160.C1. click Training Files. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Adding Keynotes | 735 . click Keynote ➤ Element. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation.rfa. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. you place keynotes on objects. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. In the Keynotes dialog. Roof Edge4. use keynote 07645.D11. and click Open. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. Click to place the leader arm.

10 In the Keynotes dialog.D11. and click . click Edit/New.6 Click Modify. For the 2x6. click Detail Component.G1. use keynote 09250. FasciaProfile_1. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. navigate to 07645. click Keynote ➤ Element. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Save the file.F1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. You do this in order to keynote the component.20 Ga. For the 2x8. 17 Keynote the component. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). For the 2x12. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06160. use keynote 06110. 11 Click OK 3 times. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.D1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. click in the Value column. 12 On the Design Bar.F1. select Corrugated Metal. use keynote 06110. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 06110. 15 In the Type Selector.I1.A8. using keynote 07460. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.

18 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 13 In the Type Selector. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 6 Lock the line. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 In the Type Selector. click Load. 15 Click Modify. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. select the left end point of the reference line. and click (Element Properties). 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. click Lines. click Duplicate. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 8 In the Save As dialog. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Modify. select Medium Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 22 On the Options Bar. and select the right end point. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 20 Click OK 3 times. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 19 In the Name dialog. 5 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Press DELETE. and click Open. for File name. click Detail Component.rft. select Medium Lines.

i_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 25 Next. 40 Click Modify. and click . click Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Using the same method used previously. click in the Value column. on the Edit toolbar. click Training Files. 47 Select the component. and i_Light Line Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 38 On the Design Bar. and hidden) used in the view. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click . 48 Using the same method used previously. 34 In the Name dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. and assign it keynote 07260. invisible. and assign it keynote 06110.A1. 44 On the Design Bar. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . click Duplicate. (Move). click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 29 In the drawing area. enter EPDM Membrane. against the 3/4" plywood. and click the lower end at the break line. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. name the component Air Barrier. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. select i_Light Line Detail Component. You add the components to the project and keynote them. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. and click Open. 35 In the Type Properties dialog.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click . and click OK. 49 With the component selected. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 46 Click Modify.G1. click Edit/New. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 30 Click Modify. 24 While pressing CTRL.A5. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 31 Select the component.

53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select Chain. leaving the detail component lines. click Detail Component. 55 Click Modify. and click . 52 In the Type Selector. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.

Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 68 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element.58 Using the method used previously. 67 In the Type Selector. select the component. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 2 x 8 Framing. select Invisible Lines. click Load into Projects. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260. 60 On the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component.rfa. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 63 In the drawing area.A4. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. and Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component.

7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. click Browse.txt. and click . 71 In the drawing area. under Path Type. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click Open. add a keynote for the component. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt.69 Select the component. click Keynote ➤ Element. select all the keynotes.A9. and press TAB. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click File menu ➤ Save. 11 Click Modify. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 07463. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and close the text editor. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07463.A1. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes.A4. 72 Save the file. The database file opens in a text editor. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 70 Using the method used previously. select Absolute. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741.A1. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. name the component Batt Insul. In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. under Keynote Table. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).. and click OK. and click to place the note. 9 In the drawing area. and click OK. and press TAB. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. click to place the leader. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 3 In the text editor. Enter 07460. and assign it keynote 07210. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.

Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 14 Save the file. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Center to Center is selected. select 3" = 1'-0". 13 Click Modify.dwg. select Black and White. click Training Files. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library.rvt. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. For Colors. After you create a drafting view. for Scale. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Positioning. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. The detail that you import is in DWG format. verify that Auto .

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 5 Click Modify. click Callout. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . 6 Select the callout. and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.■ Click Open. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). right-click Drafting 1. The detail is imported as an import symbol. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. select Reference other view. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 6 In the Project Browser. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported.

and double-click the callout. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog./Details. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. click Modify. The callout is updated with the sheet information.Elev. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . double-click A105 . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser./Sect. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. delete the existing value. 10 In the Rename dialog.No Reference). click Edit/New. enter Detail . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. click Rename.No Reference. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . and click Properties. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. for New. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail.18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. for Name. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". click Detail Component. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. and click OK.rvt. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . enter Header @ Sliding Door.

for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and enter 5/8". select Wide Lines. 17 Click Modify. click Filled Region. enter Gyp. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 19 In the Type Selector. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Name dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. select the width dimension. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. Board. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Duplicate. 20 On the Design Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region.5 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 18 While pressing CTRL. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . On the Options Bar. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. click .

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and on the Edit toolbar. Move the cursor up. (Draw). and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). and click above the top of the region as the end point. 24 Select the mirrored region. click 22 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point.

Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. verify that the thickness is 3/4". 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Name dialog. click Region Properties.25 Click Modify. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . click (Align). select Wood . select Medium Lines. On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. Draw a rectangle as shown. and click OK. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. and select the right edge of the wood region. 33 Click OK 3 times. click (Rectangle). for Name. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. enter Wood .Finish.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

click . select Medium Lines. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 38 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . click Ref Plane. click Finish Sketch. enter 1/4". 39 In the Type Selector. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. For Offset. sketch the new region as shown.37 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. 42 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 40 On the Options Bar.

50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Select Chain. and click to select the point. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). For Offset. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. enter 3/8". 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. enter 0. Move the cursor right 1". and press ENTER. Move the cursor left 1". 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . (Align). For Offset. Move the cursor down 1'. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar.46 On the Tools toolbar. 47 Click the reference plane. and press ENTER. click Filled Region. click 48 Click Modify.

and select the bottom horizontal line. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click (Trim/Extend). select Medium Lines. click Finish Sketch. 58 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . enter 1/8". 56 On the Design Bar. and right edges of the door panel region. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).54 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. top.

and click Open. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Training Files. 69 Select the bolt. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 62 Select the left detail line. 65 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify.rfa. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. enter 3". 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Component. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 68 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select the height dimension. and press ENTER.

79 In the Type Selector. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 80 On the Options Bar. 76 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. use the images as a guide. click Load. click Detail Component.70 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. and click Open. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . select Wide Lines. 78 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Training Files. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click . Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.

click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar. 87 Click Modify. click . (Mirror).82 Select the rectangle. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 92 Select the line.89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. select Medium Lines. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click (Mirror). as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 .

103 Add two break lines as shown. click . click Detail Component. click Detail Lines. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. and click to place the arc as shown. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 99 Click Modify. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select the length dimension. enter 1/8". and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. 97 On the Options Bar. select Break Line.

and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. The dimension display is updated. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. Select Suppress 0 Feet. click Dimension. for Text ➤ Units Format.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 113 Click OK 3 times. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Duplicate. 114 On the Design Bar. 107 Select the dimension line. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . 110 In the Name dialog. and click Modify. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. . 109 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Detail Linear . For Rounding. click Edit/New. select To the nearest 1/16". 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click in the Value column. 106 Click to place the dimension. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. and click OK.3/32" Arial. the new style displays only inches.

for Below. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. and enter Varies. select Replace With Text. using the Drag Text grip. and then click the dimension text. enter See Schedule. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 117 Select the dimension line. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. click Dimension. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .115 In the Type Selector. 121 Click OK.3/32”Arial. 120 Under Text Fields.

select Replace With Text.125 Select Modify to end the command. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 128 Click OK. 130 Click OK. and click the dimension text. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. under Dimension Value.

and click to place the text. 138 On the Design Bar. click to create an arced leader. 134 Enter Gyp. 132 In the Options Bar. 139 Save the file.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select the gypsum board region on the left. and on the Options Bar. click Text. 135 Select the note. Board. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 133 In the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click (Add Right Arc Leader). and click Modify.

The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.rvt. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and double-click East. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. 761 .

rfa. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Symbol. click Modify.Hexagon. 8 Select the keynote. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. type 1. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 5 On the Options Bar. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 7 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Training Files. for Number of Leaders.

12 On the Edit toolbar. type Seal existing doors and insulate. on the Options Bar. and click OK.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Element Properties). and click above the tag to place the copy. for Text. under Identity Data. 13 Select the tag. Creating a Note Block | 763 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Copy).

18 Using the same method. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 15 For Text. 17 Click OK. type Repair existing door surround. 16 For Tag.14 With the copy selected. 19 With the tag selected. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. click (Element Properties). on the Edit toolbar. 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . (Mirror). type B. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and click. and on the Options Bar. click Copy. on the Options Bar.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 22 Optionally. Remove all existing windows.21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. using the table as a reference. Repair as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate.

for Header text. select Exterior Construction Notes. for Heading. On the Formatting tab. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and for Alignment. type Mark. Select Text. for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. and select Bold. for the value. and click Add. 26 Click OK. and double-click A103 . 24 In the New Note Block dialog. expand Sheets (all). 29 In the Project Browser. and click Add. select Tag. 27 In the column header (text). 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Appearance tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for Note block name. Create. and drag it to the sheet.Elevations. and click OK. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 28 In the Project Browser. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. verify that Arial is selected. type 1/4''. type Exterior Construction Notes. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Center. type Description. format. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. select Tag. under Available fields.

33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all). you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.rvt.31 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. double-click T . click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

7 In the Project Browser. Select Sheet Name. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. under Available fields.Title Sheet. On the Filter tab. and drag it to the sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Index. and click Add. under Sheets (all). and in the third field. 5 In the list title field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Filter by. for Sort by. and click Add. The drawing list displays. in the second field. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type T. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. ■ 4 Click OK. in the first field. double-click T . select does not equal.

doors. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Finally. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. door frame schedule. and so on). building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. click Modify. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Training File Using Legends | 769 . For the text. windows. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. and door frames. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. 11 Save the file. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model.

you create a text type with the necessary size. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . click Duplicate. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote .Open Level Head .rvt. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. type Typical Symbol Legend. type 1/8''. type Legend Text. 10 For Text Size. for Name. for Name. select Arial. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Text. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 9 For Text Font. click Symbol.

12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. verify that is selected. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . and for Leader. click Typical Symbol Legend.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 14 Working from the top down. expand Sheets (all). and click to place it. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and double-click A101 . expand Legends.Site Plan/Floor Plan.

select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.Unit 18. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify. under Sheets.17 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 19 In the Project Browser. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. double-click A102 .

9 Select the second wall. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. click Legend Component. for Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 3 For Scale. click Modify. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Section. and on the Options Bar. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. and click OK. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. for Name. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.rvt. For View. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 4th Floor Wall Types. type 3'. 8 On the Design Bar. For Host length.

click Text. 11 In the Type Selector. for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Component Legend | 775 . 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 18 Type the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar.

under Legends. and click New Sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. 22 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. select Level 4.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. under Floor Plans. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 24 In the Project Browser.

27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Creating a Component Legend | 777 .25 On the Design Bar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. under Floor Plans. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. click Modify to end the command. The open drawings are both visible. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Project Browser. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. click (Match Type). select the Wall Type 2 component. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Level 4.

778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Detail Level: Medium. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.32 In the floor plan view. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 34 On the View Control Bar.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. In this exercise. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . under Floor Plans. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. click 36 Save the file. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. These changes can be due to owner requests. You can create a sequence of revisions. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. contractor inquiries. or changes in building material availability. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Using the table.35 Optionally. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. double-click Level 4.

for Numbering. When you use this option. In general. If you select Per Sheet. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. verify that Per Project is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. if the active revision is number 1. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 7 Under Show. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . For example. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 5 For Description. type a date. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. If Visible is not selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. In most instances. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

click (Move). and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 5 Select the divider. click Modify. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Floor Plans. including revision number and revision date. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 6 On the Design Bar. you make changes to the project floor plan. double-click Level 4. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 9 Save the file. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. move the cursor up. 3 Select the divider.rvt. 4 On the Edit toolbar.8 Click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

select Snaps Off. 8 In the drawing area. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click near the partition you moved. and click OK. click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 11 On the Design Bar. In the Snaps dialog. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. you load a revision tag into the project. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 16 Click OK. select 6. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 17 Save the file. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab.

5 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rfa. and because the revision is the first in the project. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. the cloud is tagged as number 1. You then issue a revision. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 11 Click to place the tag. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you need to add one. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Save the file. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. scroll down to Revision Clouds. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click OK. 6 Click Load. 10 In the drawing area. Because you chose to number by project. under Floor Plans. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 8 In the Tags dialog. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. you create additional revisions in the revision table. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 4. Working with Revisions In this exercise. select Leader.

you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. with the description Relocate Door. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.Unnamed. Working with Revisions | 785 . 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule.rvt. You do this by issuing the revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Add. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click A107 . 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. You can continue to add revisions. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 7 For Description. and enter a date for the revision. 9 Click OK. 8 Add another revision row. and click OK. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you prevent further changes to the revision. and enter a date. NOTE After you issue a revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. under Sheets. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. type Modify Paving Area. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. select Issued.

select Seq. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Revision Cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 12 In the drawing area. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. in the drawing area. 3 . apply Seq. for Revision. 20 On the Project Browser.Relocate Door to the revision cloud.Modify Paving Area. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 2 . 17 Using the same method learned previously. click to add a revision clouds. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 11 On the Drafting tab.Unnamed. select the revision cloud. double-click A107 . 13 Click Finish Sketch. 19 To add tags. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). double-click Level 4.

for Numbering. height. For each revision. 26 In the drawing area. Working with Revisions | 787 . Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. you edit the titleblock family. select the titleblock. clear Issued. and rotation) to the revision schedule.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. beginning with "D". Click Options. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. for Sequence. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. You do this so that the revision can be changed. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. select Alphabetic. 25 Click OK twice. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. delete the first 3 characters.

Select Outline. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and drag it above the schedule area. click Edit Family. select Bottom-up. Select Grid lines. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. for Appearance. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 33 Select the schedule header. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. for Build Schedule. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built.27 On the Options Bar. click Yes. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and click Properties. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Edit. 28 In the alert dialog. click Modify. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Load into Projects. Clear Blank row before data. under Other.

the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. under Other. and click Properties. for Formatting. Working with Revisions | 789 .The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. select User defined. click Edit. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 40 Select the revision schedule header. select 90° Counterclockwise. open the titleblock family for editing. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. With a user-defined height. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Heading. for Height. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. right-click Revision Schedule. When the height property is variable. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser.. for Rotation on Sheet. enter Rev. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 46 Click OK twice. 45 On the Appearance tab. select the revision schedule.

50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Yes. text. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.

double-click T . and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Training Files. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Modify. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. and place it on a sheet. for Leader. click Text. under Sheets. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T .Importing Image Files In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.JPG. click to add text without a leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Image Files | 791 .Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.

click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar.doc text file in another window. 6 Select the text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. 11 Save the file. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. with the new text box still selected. click Modify. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.

10 On the Design Bar. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 .JPG. and saved as Fixture Schedule.mdi. 5 Click OK. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 3 In Microsoft Excel.rvt. for File name. This step has been completed for you. for Name. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.Unit 18. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. type Fixture Schedule. click Modify. click Desktop. double-click A102 . 4 Under Printer. 12 Save the file. click Training Files. 7 In the Revit MEP window. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.JPG. 1 In the Project Browser. This process may vary from system to system. under Sheets. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print.xls. select the document writer. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. and click Save. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

794 .

To effectively document this project. or footprint.Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. The large floor plan. you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. as well as a large lab building. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 795 . called dependent views.

796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. click Training Files.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . click (Group).

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin.

click Modify. expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 .Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 821 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated. click Modify. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. as shown. one mirrored.

23 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. Modifying a Group | 823 .Save the training file 22 On the File menu. click Save As. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.

press TAB.3 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member.).). and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). select the element.). 4 Move the cursor over the door. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and click to select the door. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

Modifying a Group | 825 . 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. clear Tag on Placement. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Door.8 On the Design Bar.

In edit group mode. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. click Modify. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 22 In the drawing area. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out.16 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up.

29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish. created in an earlier lesson. 28 On the group editor toolbar. (Element Properties). enter 7'. click Modify. Nesting Groups | 827 . 25 Select the opening. which acts as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click 27 For Base Offset. for Unconnected Height. and on the Options Bar.24 On the Design Bar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. you add the Typical Kitchen group. enter 3' 4''. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups In this exercise. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. under Constraints.

rvt. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping . select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. 5 In the drawing area. in the Project Browser.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group).

click Finish. under Floor Plans. and each of the bifold doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser. Nesting Groups | 829 . Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. such as text. you add door tags to a group. under Floor Plans. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. In the next exercise. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. double-click First Floor. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as door and window tags.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and filled regions. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan.

click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.

select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. click Text. click to add an arc leader.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 16 In the drawing area. and on the Design Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. click Modify. 14 On the Edit toolbar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. click (Group). 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 12 Enter Tile.

18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Second Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 21 In the drawing area. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 22 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and click Create Instance. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. expand Detail. under Groups. under Floor Plans.

as shown. clear Leader. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping .rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.manner that a drawing component can be added. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. click Tag ➤ By Category. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. and click OK. click (Group). click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog. double-click Second Floor. 9 On the Edit toolbar. for Attached Detail Group Name. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 11 In the Project Browser. click Check None.7 On the Options Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . select Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.

you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Place Detail. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. therefore. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 On the Design Bar. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 14 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.

select 2 Bedroom Unit. browse to the Desktop. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. A warning dialog displays. accept the default template file. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click Create Instance. and expand Model. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Save Group. and click Save. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click OK. click Desktop. 5 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. In this case. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. verify that Project is selected. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Groups\Model. 3 For File name. and click OK.rvt. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . verify that Same as group name is selected. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Open. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog.rvt.

20 On the Options Bar. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. select the linked Revit model. click Training Files. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. expand Revit Links. and click OK. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Modify. click Use Existing. click Remove Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 17 On the Design Bar. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Link.rvt.rvt file is added as a link to the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 24 In the message dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. When a group is converted to a link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Bind. and on the Options Bar.

doors. You can enable Worksharing for any project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. After the project is shared. however. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. go to the Worksets dialog. use Element Borrowing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. 839 . a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. All other team members can view this workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. When you are working on a shared project. such as walls. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. floors. you must first enable Worksharing. called Worksharing. Elements specific to a view. In this tutorial. such as annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. To make a workset editable. The first time you activate worksets within a project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Using Worksharing. select the desired workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. A workset is a collection of building elements. and click Editable. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. stairs. they cannot make changes to it. and so on. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you specify an active workset.

you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. After learning the fundamentals. Instead. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. such as a tenant interior. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. In the next exercise. When setting up Worksharing. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. In a multi-story structure.

the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. with each assigned a specific functional task. designers work in teams. Experience has shown that. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Shared Levels and Grids. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Regardless of the default setting. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . When creating the new worksets. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. You should have at least one workset for each person. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. and View worksets. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. for a typical project. In most projects. When you create a new workset. On this tab. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. not including the Project Standards. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Team member roles Typically. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view.

Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. This is called “Selective Open. the file is saved as the central file. When you save to the central file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. your changes are saved. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. When you save locally (to your local file). 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can select which workset is active. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. within the local file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. This makes them available to other team members. however. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. For example. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. your changes propagate to the entire team. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. if a workset named Interior was created. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. After saving to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. On the Options Bar. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. As you work. proceeds as usual. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Therefore. Generally. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When you save to the central file. you should then save to your local file. you make that workset editable by you. However. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When finished or at regular intervals.

you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. and then save the local file. if you know who checked out the required workset. for instance. To do this. Alternatively. In this situation. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. using VPN. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you should check out the Materials workset. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you work no differently then you would in the office. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. In this instance. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . In this conceptual exercise. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. and make that workset editable. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. save to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. When working remotely. make any required worksets editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team.

Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Your username displays as the present owner. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.In the next exercise. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. under Show. click Training Files.rvt. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . The Worksets dialog displays. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. In the left pane of the Open dialog. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. click Worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice all are editable by you. and open Common\c_Worksets. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 3 In the Worksets dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names.

click New. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. click OK. select Workset1. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. When you initially activate Worksharing. expand Floor Plans. 8 Click OK. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. a small number of team members are working on the building model. however. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. ■ 5 Under Show. Only User-Created worksets should display. You do. 11 In the Worksets dialog. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. For example. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. type the name Exterior Shell. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. and double-click Level 1. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 9 Click New.When you enable worksharing. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". you should turn off Visible by default in all views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 16 In the drawing area. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. clear Visible by default in all views. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. you can rename the default workset. and Views. it is better to make them visible by default. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. imagine four users including yourself. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. and click OK. another is assigned the interior layout. clear Families. 13 In the Rename dialog. Project Standards. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 12 Click Rename. For training purposes. In this training file. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. currently named Workset1. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . Therefore. expand Views (all). In this simple training project. Because the interior walls appear in many views. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. In this case.

stairs. 21 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. and walls. including the interior doors. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 23 Select all of the interior elements. under Identity Data. select Interior Layout for Workset. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.17 On the Options Bar. 29 Click OK. under Identity Data. click the Worksets tab. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. and click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click Visibility/Graphics. click . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. 19 Click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 26 On the View menu. 24 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data.

under Floor Plans.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. under Identity Data. 44 On the File menu. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 30 On the View menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. double-click Level 2. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click Worksets. under Views (all). 36 In the Element Properties dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. 39 Click Save. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. 32 Select Interior Layout. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 35 On the Options Bar. you enabled Worksharing on a project. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click Close. and click OK. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 42 On the right side of the dialog. In this exercise. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. click . This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 33 In the Project Browser. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. If any interior elements remain. Now that you have created the central file. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click Save As. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Non Editable. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click Visibility/Graphics. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 38 In the Save As dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 34 In the drawing area. 43 Click OK. 41 In the Worksets dialog.

click Open. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. select Interior Layout. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 2 In the Open dialog.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Worksets. In this case. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. click Save As. Next. 6 On the File menu. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Before working on the model. select all the User-Created worksets. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and select Specify. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. expand Views (all). 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and click Save. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. you create your local file. 7 In the Save As dialog. please do so before continuing. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 4 Click Open. make modifications to the building model. select the central file. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click OK. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select Interior Layout for Name. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. check out worksets. 15 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Window menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. In addition. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. and click OK. click Options. and select Yes for Editable. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 12 Click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 11 In the Worksets dialog.

notice the Editable Only option. If this is selected. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click Modify. click Worksets. 24 Click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. In this case. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. In the Worksets dialog. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. 23 On the File menu. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. you can still edit this wall. and click OK.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . under Identity Data. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Verify that it is cleared. however. 22 Click OK. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar. Because this element is not owned by another user. If it was owned by another user. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 18 On the Options Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 20 Under Constraints. 21 On the Options Bar. click .

29 In the Type Selector. 34 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Door. 31 On the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Wall. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 26 Delete the door. click Modify.

If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and save locally immediately afterward. you should relinquish all worksets. You modified the building model. a tooltip. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. save to central. it is recommended. two users access the central file through a network connection. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. In addition. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. displays the workset as well as the element type. please do so before continuing. checked out worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. click Save to Central. leave this file open in its current state. make elements editable. For training purposes. By default. and reload the latest changes. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Throughout the process. add two door openings into the rooms you created. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. each user must check out worksets. Whenever you save. you should perform regular saves. you created your local file. In this exercise. At the end of a work session. In this particular case. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. When working in your local file. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Borrowed Elements is selected.35 Using the following illustration as a guide.

and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. enter User 2.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. and click Save. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 3 On the Settings menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 9 Click Open. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. return to the Settings dialog. and select Specify. click Options. 7 In the Open dialog. and click OK. In the following section of this exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Yes for Editable. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. skip the following section. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Worksets. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. This file is for your use only. one user has already created a local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Save As. select the central file. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. instructions are staggered. under Username. and click OK. click Options. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. For training purposes. click Open. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. consider that person to be User 1. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. You now have a local copy of the project. 12 In the Save As dialog. 15 On the File menu. 11 On the File menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. In addition.rvt.

and double-click Level 1.” 29 Click OK. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and double-click Level 1. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. User 1: Check out worksets. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . and select Yes for Editable. expand Floor Plans. click Save to Central. If it is not open. expand Floor Plans. select the lower exterior wall. 19 On the File menu. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. it becomes the active workset. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 27 On the File menu. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open.You are now the owner of that workset. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. modify the building model. 17 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 23 Click OK. click Worksets. open it now.

33 On the File menu.” 35 Click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets. click Save to Central. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. under Floor Plans. When you save to central. you should create a furniture plan view. select Yes for Editable. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . The changes User 2 made are apparent. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 43 In the Project Browser. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 45 In the Rename View dialog. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Floor Plans. However. and click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Worksets. click Save to Central. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 46 In the Project Browser. 44 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. and click Rename.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. under Views (all). Click Yes. click Reload Latest. right-click Level 1. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Before adding any furniture. 37 On the File menu. 42 Select Furniture Layout. right-click Copy of Level 1.” 39 Click OK. 41 On the File menu. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset.

and click OK. click the Worksets tab. click Component. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 50 On the View menu. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 60 In the Rename dialog. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 66 On the File menu. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Edit/New. and click OK. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. under Show. click Save to Central.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 65 Click OK. NOTE System families. and click Element Properties. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 61 Click OK 2 times. Therefore. 62 On the File menu. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Worksets. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 53 On the File menu. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. such as Wall Types. click Visibility/Graphics. rather than Families. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 49 On the Design Bar. select Project Standards. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Rename.” 55 Click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. are placed under Project Standards. click Modify. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. enter Exterior Wall .200mm. and click inside any room. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 48 In the Type Selector. click Reload Latest. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . choose any desk.

two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. select the following. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. you need to set up your central and local files. In subsequent steps. Each user must have network access to the central file. throughout this training. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. click Save As. click Training Files. As each of you work. leave this file open in its current state.rvt. At the appropriate point in this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. select Reload Latest. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. finished the previous workset exercises. modified the building model. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. and save 69 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. click Options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. select Save to Central. 70 On the File menu. and still have your local files open. leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Each user checked out worksets. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and these problems are rectified. Checking out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. In the final exercise of this tutorial. There are specific instructions for each user. and click OK. you save the training file as a central file. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. User 1: Reload latest. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).

15 Click Open. click Options. Set the Username to User 2. click Save As. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. click Save As. Next. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and select Specify. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. 17 On the File menu. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click Save. and click OK. and click OK. select Make this a Central File after save. 18 In the Save As dialog. 6 On the File menu. click Open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 8 In the Save As dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In addition. The central file should still be open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click OK. click Options. 12 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. This is a system setting. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click Save. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. select the central file. On the Settings menu. This is the local file for User 1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 13 In the Open dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 5 Click Save. return to the Settings dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience.

You are now the owner of that workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and click Editing Requests. select them. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Open. 24 Under Active Workset. After you submit the request. and then click OK. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select the second window from the top. and select Yes for Editable. select Interior Layout. click Worksets. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the Interior Layout workset. Afterwards. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 30 On the left exterior wall. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. At this point. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 22 In the Worksets dialog. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. under Floor Plans. and then click OK. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 29 On the Options Bar. select Exterior Shell. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. double-click Level 1. You are now the owner of that workset. click the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. verify that Editable Only is cleared. click Worksets. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 27 Under Active Workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time.

and close 39 On the File menu. and the other user granted it. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. click Close. click Check Now. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. select Save to Central. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. In this case. to Local. and notice the window is in the new location. and click OK. you requested permission to edit the element. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 38 Click OK. In this multi-user exercise.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . select the request submitted by User 2. 36 Click Close. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. select the following. 35 Click Grant.

860 .

it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In addition. For example. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this tutorial. Using design options.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. At any time in the design process. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). 861 . and each option set can have multiple schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.

After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. you can edit it. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. make your final design decision. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click New. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set.rvt. each with multiple design options. In the second exercise. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Training Files. therefore. 2 In the Design Options dialog. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . TIP In this exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. the roof and structure systems must work together. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you design each of the structural options. In the first exercise in this lesson.In this particular case. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. After you create a design option. the only available command is to create a new option set. With the second option. under Option Set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you set up multiple design option sets. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each is constructed for interchangeability. The client has asked you to create various options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered.

7 In the Type Selector. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. or add a dimension string between the columns. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. In the following illustration. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. By selecting Multiple. 5 On the View menu. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and the third column centered between the two. expand Floor Plans. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and click Close. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. select: ■ ■ ■ . the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. In this case. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click 12 On the Options Bar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Column. 4 In the Project Browser.3 Select Option 1 (primary). TIP To center the middle column. click Edit Selected. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 9 On the Design Bar. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. add three columns. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. click Modify. expand Views (all).

add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 18 On the View toolbar. they are difficult to see in this view. When you are finished. Because of the size of the columns. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . using the same technique. click .TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 17 Zoom out and. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.

22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Adding a beam is a two-click process. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click TOP OF CORE. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Next. The first click specifies the beam start point. In it. Zoom in on the upper right column. you add the beams that span the columns. 23 On the Design Bar. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. select Round Bar : 2". and click at its center to set the beam start point. under Floor Plans. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Beam. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 .

and click the center point. and select the center of the column to add a copy.25 On the Edit toolbar. click . 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. click 26 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.

click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Roofing for New. enter Structure for New. enter Beam for New. under Option. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click Rename. 46 Under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . click New. name the option Louvers. under Option Set. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option Set. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. click Rename. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. 36 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. not a new option set. 43 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. 45 Under Roofing. under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof.

When finished. select Option 2. click Rename. Under Now Editing. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Edit Selected. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 52 Click Close. and click OK. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 51 Under Edit. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 53 In the Project Browser.47 Under Roofing. 48 Under Option. name the option Sunscreen. it will resemble the following illustration. under Floor Plans. under Structure. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. you create the second design option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs.

The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Align. click Component. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Type Selector. 58 On the Tools menu. select Roof Beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 .

The second click represents the move end point. 62 Select the beam and.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. on the Edit toolbar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The first click sets the move start point. click Modify.

the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 67 On the Tools menu. 66 On the View toolbar.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 70 On the File menu. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Finish Editing. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Save. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. name the file. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Save As. Notice that even before you close the dialog.rvt. click . which is visible by default. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. i_Urban_House-in progress. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . you need this file in its current state. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 69 Click Close. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.

The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. the other for beams. In the next exercise. The second roofing system. select Louvers (primary). you set up multiple design option sets. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Edit. delete them after the rafter is in place. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Edit Selected. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under Roofing. you design each of the roofing options. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. The first option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 8 In the Type Selector. Sunscreen. expand Floor Plans. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. expand Views (all). a Louver system. 2 On the Tools menu. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.rvt. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. each with multiple design options to pick from. open it now. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. select Rafter 2 x 10.In this exercise. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. 5 Click Close. 10 Referring to the following illustration. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 6 In the Project Browser. do so now. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Component. Under Now Editing. 3 In the Design Options dialog. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. With the second option. If you need to add dimensions.

You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Enter 5 for Number. 13 On the Options Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Array. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . 15 On the Edit menu. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. click . The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 38' 6" for Length. under Other. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. and click OK. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

you can enter 3 3. TIP When entering a dimension value. enter 3' 3". rather than entering 3' 3".18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The space separates feet and inches. For example. and press ENTER.

22 On the Design Bar. Enter 34 for Number. under Other. and click OK. and select the louver you just placed. click . enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 For the array starting point. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 23 On the Options Bar. click the Edit menu. and. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. select Louver 2 x 6. click Component. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. enter 1’. click Modify. 20 In the Type Selector.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. when the listening dimension displays. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . and click Array. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. Select Constrain. and press Enter.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system is complete.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. click . under Edit. 29 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. 30 On the Tools menu.

Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. expand Elevations. 40 On the Options Bar. and the third point defines the arc. click Properties. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. Click OK. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. and double-click West. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 43 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. then you can modify it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. click . The first two points define the ends of the line. 39 On the Design Bar. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. the top of the next column on the right. 41 Select the top of the left column. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. You will fix this in a later step. select Sunscreen. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. under Roofing. and then click Close. Therefore. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Edit Selected. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. click Lines. 33 Under Editing. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. In this case.

52 On the File menu. 50 On the Tools menu.44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. you designed each of the roofing options. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the View toolbar. you need this file in its current state. then the center arc. a Louver system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. The arcs should connect. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Select the right arc. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. The second roofing system. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. Under Constraints. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 46 On the Tools menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. under Edit. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 45 Click OK. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. click . click Finish Editing. In this exercise. Sunscreen. The first option. 48 On the Design Bar. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. click Trim/Extend. The louver roof system is complete. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Under Constraints. and then click Close. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion.

under Views (all). 9 Click OK. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Managing Design Options | 879 . 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click OK. and click Duplicate. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. secondary. under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. expand 3D Views. tertiary. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. After exploring the combinations. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. double-click Primary Option.Managing Design Options In this exercise. under Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 11 On the View menu. you select a design. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. and delete the discarded design options. and last options. right-click {3D}. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 5 Right-click each of the copies. make it part of the building model. enter Primary Option. do so now. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.

16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Tertiary Option. 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Last Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. under 3D Views. 19 On the View menu. under Views (all). under 3D Views. and click OK. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.

25 Select Structure. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. This was the client choice for structural. since you no longer need them. the beam option becomes part of the model. 24 Under Option. An alert is displayed. The set is deleted. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 29 Select Roofing. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 30 Under Option Set.At this point. click Delete. double-click Primary Option. click Yes. the current primaries are no longer options. select Beam. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 31 In the alert dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Accept Primary. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. Because the client has selected the design option. Managing Design Options | 881 . under Structure. click Yes. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In this case. select Make Primary. 26 Under Option Set. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 27 In the alert dialog. In your design options. click Close. 22 On the Tools menu.

After exploring the combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you selected a design. made it part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. In this exercise. 35 On the File menu. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Save.

then add new walls and doors in a different location. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. 883 . For the client. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. demolish existing walls and doors. demolish existing construction. and then add new building model elements. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.Project Phasing 19 In any project. This changes room definition and total building model area. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You create new phases. You create new phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. complete with schedules. In the second exercise.

and click OK. 7 Click Cancel. and double-click Level 1. click Training Files. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. under Phasing. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . you do not need to change the project units to metric. 4 Click Cancel. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. This means that all building model elements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. During the demolition and renovation process. As you add new elements to the building model. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. define the units. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial.rvt. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. click (Element Properties). When you create a new project. and open Common\c_Phasing. click Modify. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 On the Options Bar. regardless of phase.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. go to the Settings menu. click Project Units. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. are visible in this view. If you wish to do so. under Phasing.

12 On the Options Bar. for Phase Created. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a phase-specific view. select Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Level 1 . including the door tags. under Floor Plans. After you release the mouse button. 20 In the Rename dialog. After you create the views. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Phasing. click Modify. are highlighted in red. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. click . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. and click OK.Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Because this is a renovation project. and click OK. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views.Demo. and click Rename. 14 On the Design Bar. Phasing Your Model | 885 .Existing. all of the building model elements. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. and click Rename. TIP If this were a multi-story building.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 11 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. clear Door Tags. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 .Existing. right-click Level 1 . 17 Click No.

886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . for Phase. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and click OK. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 28 Under Filter Name. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Demolished. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. new construction occurs after existing construction. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. There are five default phase filters. enter Composite Plan. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 21 In the Project Browser. you modify these settings. double-click Level 1 . select Existing. under Floor Plans. to which all the building model elements belong. double-click Level 1 . On a logical time line. 26 In the Phasing dialog. under Floor Plans. Existing.Existing. You may need to zoom in to see this. Later in this exercise. however. select Overridden. 27 Click New. 24 In the Project Browser. In this case. 29 For Composite Plan. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. click the Phase Filters tab. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under New. and Temporary. Next.Demo. under Phasing. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. Because of this time relationship. Phase status is time-dependent.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override.

33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Phasing Your Model | 887 . When you demolish the host. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. or you can use the demolish tool. under Cut ➤ Lines. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 35 Click OK twice. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. As you click each wall. click (Demolish). That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. There are two ways to demolish an element. under Floor Plans.31 Under Phase Status. double-click Level 1 .Demo. double-click Level 1 . you demolish all elements hosted by it. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 36 Using the same method. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. select a lighter blue. 39 In the Phasing dialog.Existing. select the line style. you begin demolition. select Demolished. Next. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 32 In the Demolished row. click the value for Color. click OK. select red. its display changes to a red dashed line. 42 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Color dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. under Floor Plans. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display.

and click OK. select Show Previous + New. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector.Existing. under Phasing. 51 Add a door leading into each room. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. and click OK. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Demo. click Wall. 49 On the Design Bar. 53 Open Level 1 . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . The demolished walls no longer display. 50 In the Type Selector. 55 In the Element Properties dialog.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". for Phase Filter.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 52 Open Level 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. add a long horizontal wall. click Door. under Phasing. for Phase Filter. select Basic Wall: Interior .

Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.New. 59 Open Level 1 . regardless of phase. 57 In the Project Browser. 61 On the View Control Bar. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.New. which are displayed as red. 62 If necessary. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. and existing shows as half-tone. new is shown in blue. Phasing Your Model | 889 . click (Default 3D View).The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .Demo. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 60 On the View toolbar. right-click Level 1 . All elements are displayed in this view. The renovated building model plan is displayed. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. because the phase filter is set to Show All. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).

you do not need to change the project units to metric. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added.New. therefore. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. sizes. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. In the next exercise. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. click Project Units. As the renovation process continues. If you wish to do so. define the units. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.rvt. Notice that this view is the original building model. you can do so at this time. click Training Files. You can also see that the room quantities. and click OK. In this view. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. demolition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Level 1 .Existing. the rooms change in both definition and size. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. All room boundaries are phase-specific.Demo. 63 Close the file. In this view. you can see the new walls added to the building model. 2 Open Level 1 . you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. In this exercise. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. go to the Settings menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. and double-click Level 1 . If you wish to save this file. and new construction.

8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Use the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 13 Open Level 1 . and maximize the view.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Room. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . click Modify.New. click Room Tag. 5 Click OK.Demo. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 6 Open Level 1 .Existing. click in each room as you move to the right. 10 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. click Room. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. In the Phasing dialog. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.

New Construction. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In this case. expand Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Window menu. In addition. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 19 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file. click Tile. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. click Close Hidden Windows. 16 In the Project Browser. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.Existing. View phase-specific room schedules. and double-click Room Schedule . add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 18 Open Room Schedule .15 Using the following illustration as a guide. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. In this exercise. The two schedule views tile. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction.

In this tutorial. 893 . and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. This maximizes efficiency. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. You position the building models on the site plan. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and manage the links throughout the project. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In the final lesson.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you link several building models within a single project f